[go: up one dir, main page]
More Web Proxy on the site http://driver.im/

WO2015062069A1 - Method for determining precoding matrix indication, receiving device, and sending device - Google Patents

Method for determining precoding matrix indication, receiving device, and sending device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015062069A1
WO2015062069A1 PCT/CN2013/086414 CN2013086414W WO2015062069A1 WO 2015062069 A1 WO2015062069 A1 WO 2015062069A1 CN 2013086414 W CN2013086414 W CN 2013086414W WO 2015062069 A1 WO2015062069 A1 WO 2015062069A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
codebook
order
precoding matrix
rank
indication information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2013/086414
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
刘建琴
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CN201380008900.4A priority Critical patent/CN104782070B/en
Priority to PCT/CN2013/086414 priority patent/WO2015062069A1/en
Publication of WO2015062069A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015062069A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • H04B7/0478Special codebook structures directed to feedback optimisation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • H04B7/0486Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting taking channel rank into account

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a method, a receiving device, and a sending device for determining a precoding matrix indication.
  • MIMO multiple input multiple output
  • y is the received signal vector
  • H is the channel matrix
  • precoding matrix is the precoding matrix
  • s is the transmitted symbol vector
  • N is the measurement noise.
  • Optimal precoding usually requires the transmitter to fully know the Channel State Information (CSI).
  • CSI Channel State Information
  • the user equipment quantizes and reports the instantaneous CSI to the base station.
  • the receiving device for example, the UE
  • the user equipment includes a mobile station (MS), a relay, a mobile telephone, a handset, and a portable device.
  • the base station includes a Node B (NodeB) base station (Base station). , BS), Access Point, Transmission Point (TP), Evolved Node B (eNB) or Relay (Relay).
  • the CSI information reported by the existing Long Term Evolution (LTE) system includes a Rank Indicator (RI), a Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI), and a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) information.
  • RI and PMI indicate the number of transport layers used and Encoding matrix.
  • the precoding matrix indicates the correspondence between the PMI and the precoding matrix.
  • precoding matrix indicates PMI
  • codebook table of each complex value component.
  • indicator numbers indicates PMI
  • a set of precoding matrices used is generally referred to as a codebook, where each precoding matrix is a codeword in a codebook.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural view of a one-dimensional linear array antenna.
  • the distribution of the linear array antenna shown in FIG. 1 includes only one direction, which is generally referred to as a horizontal direction.
  • 2 is a schematic structural view of a two-dimensional array antenna. As shown in FIG. 2, the distribution of the two-dimensional array antenna includes two directions of horizontal direction and vertical direction.
  • the codebook needs to be designed as a horizontal, vertical combined three-dimensional (3D) codebook W.
  • the horizontal direction codebook, W e2 is the vertical codebook constituting W2. .
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a method for determining a precoding matrix indication, a receiving device, and a transmitting device, to overcome the prior art method for determining a 3D codebook of a two-dimensional area array antenna, which has low precision, and thus has low precoding precision.
  • the problem is a problem.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a method for determining a precoding matrix indication, including: a receiving device, according to a reference signal sent by a sending device, selecting a precoding matrix W from a codebook, where the precoding matrix W is a direct product or a product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2, wherein the order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2) ;
  • the receiving device sends channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information.
  • the order of the second codebook W2 is Rank (W2) Is 1.
  • the channel state indication information comprising: a first precoding matrix indicator indicator codebook W1 i a And an indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
  • the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information, including:
  • the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines, according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order. Determining the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, and determining the precoding matrix according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 W.
  • the channel state indication information includes: an indicator indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook i a And an indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a channel quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank (W1 ) of the first codebook W1, and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information, including:
  • the sending device sends, by the receiving device, the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the total order of the precoding matrix W.
  • the order of the second codebook W2 is Rank (W2), and the precoding matrix W is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the method before the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the method includes:
  • the receiving device jointly encodes the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook with the order Rank (W1 ) of the first codebook W1, and the second codebook W2
  • the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix is jointly encoded with the CQI.
  • the channel state indication information includes: an indicator indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook i a An indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, the CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the receiving device sends channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device Determining the precoding matrix w according to the channel state indication information, including: the receiving device sending the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device is configured according to the second codebook W2
  • the order Rank (W2) and the total order of the precoding matrix W determine the order Rank(W1) of the first codebook W1, and according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the second The order of the codebook W2 determines the precoding matrix W.
  • the method before the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the method includes:
  • the receiving device jointly encodes the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the second codebook with the order Rank (W2 ) of the second codebook W2, and the first codebook W1 is
  • the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix is jointly encoded with the CQI.
  • the channel state indication information includes: a quantized value of a combination of an order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
  • the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information, including:
  • the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device is based on the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2
  • the combined quantized value of (W2) determines the order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, and according to the order of the first codebook W1
  • the number and the order of the second codebook W2 determine the precoding matrix W.
  • the channel state indication information further includes: a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device is based on the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2
  • the combined quantized value of (W2) determines the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (Wl) and the order of the second codebook W2, including:
  • the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device is based on the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2
  • the combined value of (W2) and the total order of the precoding matrix W determine the first code
  • the channel state indication information includes: an order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
  • the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information, including:
  • the receiving device sends channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix w according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2. .
  • the channel state indication information includes: a total order of the precoding matrix w. ;
  • the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the indication information, including:
  • the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the first codebook according to a total order of the precoding matrix w and antenna configuration information of the sending device.
  • the precoding matrix W, wherein the antenna configuration information of the transmitting device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type.
  • the first codebook W1 and the second code The W2 is selected from the 2-antenna codebook, the 4-antenna codebook, or the 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, respectively.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a method for determining a precoding matrix indication, including: sending, by a sending device, a reference signal to a receiving device;
  • the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the channel state indication information, where the precoding matrix W is a product or a direct product of two matrices W1 and W2 ,
  • the order Rank (W1 ) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
  • the second rank W2 has a rank Rank (W2) of 1.
  • the channel state indication information comprising: a first precoding matrix indicator indicator codebook W1 i a And an indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
  • Determining, by the sending device, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the channel state indication information including:
  • the transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
  • the channel state indication information includes: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a channel quality information indicator CQI, the foregoing An order Rank of a codebook W1 (W1) and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • Determining, by the sending device, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the channel state indication information including:
  • the transmitting device determines the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 according to the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
  • the channel state indication information includes: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, the CQI, and the second codebook The order Rank of W2 (W2) and the total order of the precoding matrix W; Determining, by the sending device, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the channel state indication information, including:
  • the transmitting device determines the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 according to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
  • the channel state indication information includes: a quantized value of a combination of an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
  • Determining, by the sending device, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the channel state indication information including:
  • the transmitting device determines the order of the first codebook W1 according to the combined quantized value of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 Rank (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 Rank (W2);
  • the transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
  • the channel state indication information further includes: a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the transmitting device determines the order of the first codebook W1 according to the combined quantized value of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 Rank (W1) and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, including:
  • the transmitting device is based on a combination of the quantization value of the combination of the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) and the total order of the precoding matrix W Determining the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) o
  • the channel state indication information includes: an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2; Determining, by the sending device, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the channel state indication information, including:
  • the transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
  • the channel state indication information includes: a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • Determining, by the sending device, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the channel state indication information including:
  • the transmitting device Determining, by the transmitting device, the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 according to a total order of the precoding matrix W and antenna configuration information of the transmitting device Rank (W2) o, wherein the antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type;
  • the transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
  • the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 is selected from a 2-antenna codebook, a 4-antenna codebook, or an 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, respectively.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a receiving device, including:
  • a receiving module configured to select a precoding matrix W from the codebook based on a reference signal sent by the sending device, where the precoding matrix W is a product or a direct product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2.
  • the order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), is greater than or equal to the order of the second codebook W2 (W2);
  • a sending module configured to send channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information.
  • the second rank W2 has a rank Rank (W2) of one.
  • the channel state indication information includes: a precoding matrix indicated by the first codebook W1 An indicator i a of the indicator i a and the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to:
  • the sending device determines the first code according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order
  • the order of the W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 are determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information includes: an indicator indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook i a And an indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a channel quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank(W1) of the first codebook W1, and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to:
  • the sending device determines the second according to the order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the total order of the precoding matrix W.
  • the order of the codebook W2 is Rank (W2), and the precoding matrix W is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the method further includes:
  • An encoding module configured to: before the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the indicator indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook and the order of the first codebook W1 Rank (W1) performs joint coding, and jointly encodes the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 with the CQI.
  • the channel state indication information includes: an indicator indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook i a An indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, the CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to:
  • the method further includes:
  • An encoding module configured to: before the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the second codebook and the second codebook W2
  • the number Rank (W2) performs joint coding, and the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 is jointly encoded with the CQI.
  • the channel state indication information includes: a quantized value of a combination of an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to:
  • the combined quantized value determines the order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the order of the second codebook W2, and according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook
  • the order of W2 determines the precoding matrix W.
  • the channel state indication information further includes: a total order of the precoding matrix w;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to:
  • the channel state indication information includes: an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to:
  • the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information includes: a total order of the precoding matrix w;
  • the sending module is specifically configured to:
  • the antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type.
  • the first codebook W1 and the second code The W2 is selected from the 2-antenna codebook, the 4-antenna codebook, or the 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, respectively.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a sending device, including:
  • a sending module configured to send a reference signal to the receiving device
  • a receiving module configured to receive channel state indication information sent by the receiving device
  • a processing module configured to determine, according to the channel state indication information, a precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from a codebook based on a reference signal, where the precoding matrix W is a product or a straight line of two matrices W1 and W2 Product,
  • the order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), is greater than or equal to the second codebook.
  • the second rank W2 has a rank Rank (W2) of 1.
  • the channel state indication information comprising: a first precoding matrix indicator indicator codebook W1 i a And an indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
  • the processing module is specifically configured to:
  • the device Determining the receiving according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2
  • the device is based on the precoding matrix w selected from the codebook based on the reference signal.
  • the channel state indication information includes: an indicator indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook i a And an indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a channel quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1, and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the processing module is specifically configured to:
  • the precoding matrix w selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information includes: an indicator indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook i a An indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, the CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the processing module is specifically configured to:
  • Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information includes: an order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and a combined quantized value of the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
  • the processing module is specifically configured to:
  • Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information further includes: a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the processing module is specifically configured to:
  • the channel state indication information includes: an order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and The order of the second codebook W2 Rank (W2) ;
  • the processing module is specifically configured to:
  • the precoding matrix w selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information includes: a total order of the precoding matrix w;
  • the processing module is specifically configured to:
  • the antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type;
  • Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 is selected from a 2-antenna codebook, a 4-antenna codebook, or an 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, respectively.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the method for determining the precoding matrix indication, the receiving device, and the sending device provided by the embodiment of the present invention, the order of the first codebook W1 being greater than or equal to the order of the second codebook can ensure that the order of the final precoding matrix W is Very good approximation and simulation. Therefore, the transmitting device performs precoding based on the precoding matrix selected from the codebook structure of the present invention fed back by the receiving device, which can effectively improve the accuracy of precoding, thereby reducing performance loss and improving system throughput.
  • 1 is a schematic structural view of a one-dimensional linear array antenna
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural view of a two-dimensional array antenna
  • Embodiment 3 is a flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a method for determining a precoding matrix indication according to the present invention
  • Embodiment 4 is a flowchart of Embodiment 2 of a method for determining a precoding matrix indication according to the present invention
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a receiving device according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 2 of a receiving device according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 7 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a transmitting device according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of hardware of Embodiment 3 of a receiving device according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of hardware of a second embodiment of a transmitting device according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a communication system according to the present invention.
  • the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention are clearly and completely described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention.
  • the embodiments are a part of the embodiments of the invention, and not all of the embodiments. All other embodiments obtained by a person of ordinary skill in the art based on the embodiments of the present invention without creative efforts are within the scope of the present invention.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • Advanced Long Advanced Long
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • the user equipment (User Equipment, UE for short) includes but is not limited to a mobile station (Mobile Station, MS for short), a relay (Relay), and a mobile terminal (Mobile). Terminal, mobile phone, mobile device (Handset) and portable device (Portable Equipment), etc., the user equipment can communicate with one or more core networks via a radio access network (Radio Access Network, RAN)
  • RAN Radio Access Network
  • the user device may be a mobile phone (or "cellular" phone), a computer with wireless communication capabilities, etc., and the user device may also be a portable, pocket, handheld, computer built-in or in-vehicle mobile device.
  • the base station may be a base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS for short) in GSM or CDMA, or a base station (NodeB, NB for short) in WCDMA, or an evolved base station in LTE.
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • NodeB NodeB
  • NB base station
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • a multi-antenna system refers to a system in which a transmitting device and a receiving device communicate through a plurality of antennas.
  • the sending device when the sending device is a base station, the receiving device is a UE; otherwise, when the sending device is a UE, the receiving device is a base station.
  • multiple antennas of the transmitting device and the receiving device can form a spatial diversity gain or a multiplexing gain, which can effectively improve transmission reliability and system capacity.
  • the diversity gain and multiplexing gain in a multi-antenna system can generally be obtained by a precoding method of the transmitting device and a receiving combining algorithm of the receiving device.
  • the multi-antenna system of the embodiment of the present invention can be applied to a single-point transmission scenario, that is, a transmission scenario of a transmitting device and a receiving device. It can also be applied to the scenario of multi-point joint transmission.
  • Multi-point joint transmission refers to the joint transmission of signals by multiple transmitting devices to the same receiving device. For example, transmitting device A has 2 antennas, and transmitting device B also has 2 antennas, two The transmitting devices simultaneously perform joint transmission on the receiving device. Then the signal received by the receiving device can be regarded as a signal transmitted by a 4-antenna base station.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a method for determining a precoding matrix indication according to the present invention.
  • the executor of this embodiment is a receiving device, which may be a base station or a UE.
  • the sending device may be a UE.
  • the sending device may be a base station.
  • the method in this embodiment may include:
  • Step 301 The receiving device selects a precoding matrix W from the codebook according to the reference signal sent by the sending device, where the precoding matrix W is a direct product or a product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2.
  • the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
  • the first codebook W1 may be a codebook representing a horizontal antenna
  • the second code This W2 can be a codebook representing a vertical antenna.
  • the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 are selected, the first codebook W1 representing the horizontal direction can be selected as the codebook with higher order, and the second codebook W2 representing the vertical direction can be selected. It is a codebook with a lower order. Specifically, it is assumed that the 3D codebook to be constructed, that is, the precoding matrix W, has an order of R, the order of the first codebook W1 is s, and the order of the second codebook W2 is t, and s ⁇ t is defined. .
  • the 3D codebook of order 6 is W
  • W is the product or direct product of W1 and W2
  • first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 are respectively selected from a 2-antenna codebook, a 4-antenna codebook or an 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the matrix W1 may be a matrix representing broadband channel characteristics, and the matrix W2 may be a matrix representing channel characteristics of subbands; or, the matrix W1 may be a matrix representing long-term channel characteristics, and the matrix W2 may be a matrix representing short-term channel characteristics. .
  • the first codebook W1 may be a 3rd order Rel-10 codebook
  • the second codebook W2 may be a 2nd order Rel-10 codebook. this.
  • the order Rank (W1) of the second codebook W2 may also be limited to 1. That is, the 3D codebook of any order (set to R order) can be generated by a direct product of the second codebook W2 perpendicular to the 1st order and the first codebook W1 codebook of the horizontal R order.
  • Step 302 The receiving device sends channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information.
  • the sending device may obtain the precoding matrix W of the antenna array of the receiving device according to the relationship between the PMI and the precoding matrix specified in the 3GPP according to the track state indication information.
  • the type of the reference signal in 301 is not limited in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • it may be a Channel State Information Reference Signal (CSI RS), a Demodulation Reference Signal (Demodulation RS, DM RS), or a Cell-Specific RS (CRS).
  • the CSI may also include Channel Quality Indicator/Index (CQI).
  • the UE may receive a base station notification (for example, Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling or downlink control.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • resource configuration of the reference signal based on the cell identifier ID and obtain a reference signal in the corresponding resource or subframe.
  • the W passes the product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 or Constructed to be able to represent the characteristics of the three-dimensional beam vector in the codebook, so the constructed precoding matrix W can be used as a 3-dimensional (3D) codebook; and by defining the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 such that the constructed 3D codebook W conforms to the characteristic that the antenna is less than the horizontal expansion angle at the vertical expansion angle, and therefore, the constructed 3D
  • the transmitting device performs precoding based on the precoding matrix selected from the codebook structure of the present invention fed back by the receiving device, which can effectively improve the accuracy of the precoding, thereby reducing performance loss and improving the system. Throughput.
  • step 302 after the receiving device determines the 3D codebook W, the receiving device feeds back the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the location according to the channel state indication information.
  • the process of describing the 3D codebook W can be implemented in the following six ways.
  • the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
  • the step 302 may be specifically: the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device indicates the indicator and the codebook level according to a preset rule or a preset precoding matrix.
  • the mapping relationship of the number determines the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, respectively, and according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 The number determines the precoding matrix W.
  • the sending device and the receiving device need to agree on a preset rule in advance, or pre-agreed the mapping relationship between the indicator indicated by the precoding matrix and the codebook order. Therefore, when the receiving device feeds back the channel state indication information, The order of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 may not be directly fed back, but only the indicator i a of the precoding matrix indication of the first codebook W1 and the precoding matrix indication of the second codebook W2 may be fed back.
  • the indicator i e may be, after the receiving device receives the ⁇ and i e , the order of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 may be implicitly obtained, so that the receiving device does not increase the transmission to the transmitting device.
  • the indicator indicated by the precoding matrix may be the indicator i after all the codebooks concatenated, for example, the codebook indicator of order 1 is 0 to Il-1 , the codebook indicator of order 2 is il-1 to il+i2-2, where il is the number of codebooks of order 1, i2 is the number of codebooks of order 2, and so on.
  • Table 2 The mapping relationship is shown in Table 2.
  • the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, and a channel a quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • Step 302 may specifically be:
  • the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines, according to the order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the total order of the precoding matrix W.
  • the order of the second codebook W2 is Rank (W2), and the precoding matrix W is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • Rank (W2) the total order of the precoding matrix W, Rank (W) / Rank (Wl).
  • the method may include:
  • the receiving device jointly encodes the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook with the order Rank (W1 ) of the first codebook W1, and the second codebook W2
  • the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix is jointly encoded with the CQI.
  • the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • Step 302 may specifically be:
  • the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines, according to the order Rank of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2) and the total order of the precoding matrix W.
  • the order of the first codebook W1 is Rank (W1)
  • the precoding matrix W is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the method may include:
  • the receiving device jointly encodes the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the second codebook with the order Rank (W2 ) of the second codebook W2, and the first codebook W1 is
  • the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix is jointly encoded with the CQI.
  • the channel state indication information may include: a combination of the order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the order of the second codebook, W2, Rank (W2) value.
  • Rank (W2) may be represented by various quantized values, for example, for a total order of 6.
  • step 302 may specifically be:
  • the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device is based on the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2, Rank The combined quantized value of (W2) determines the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2, and according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the The order of the second codebook W2 determines the precoding matrix W.
  • the channel state indication information may be in addition to the quantized value including the combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
  • the method includes: a total order of the precoding matrix W.
  • the first code determined by the transmitting device to further verify a combined quantized value according to a combination of the order Rank(W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank(W2) of the second codebook W2
  • the channel state indication information includes: an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
  • the receiving device does not feed back the total order of the precoding matrix W, and directly feeds back the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (Wl) of the second codebook W2,
  • the transmitting device receives the channel state indication information, and obtains the total order of the precoding matrix W according to Rank (Wl) XRank (Wl).
  • step 302 may specifically be:
  • the receiving device sends channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2. .
  • the channel state indication information may include: a total order of the precoding matrix W.
  • Step 302 may specifically be:
  • the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the first codebook according to a total order of the precoding matrix W and antenna configuration information of the sending device.
  • the antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type.
  • the number of the first antenna ports refers to the number of horizontal antenna ports of the transmitting device, and the number of the second antenna ports refers to the number of vertical antenna ports of the transmitting device.
  • the antenna configuration information of the receiving device can be sent to the sending device before step 302 or simultaneously with step 302, so that the sending device can be based on the horizontal antenna port number and the vertical antenna of the transmitting device.
  • the number of ports determines the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2. For example, when the total order of the precoding matrix W is 4, and the number of horizontal antenna ports is 4, the number of vertical antenna ports is 2, and the antenna polarization type is cross polarization, because of the cross antenna of the 2 antenna ports
  • the order is usually 1, so the default first codebook W1 has an order of 4, and the second codebook W2 has an order of 1.
  • the foregoing six receiving devices send channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines any one of the manners of the precoding matrix w according to the indication information, and feeds back the first codebook W1.
  • the number of bits may be the same as the number of feedback bits of the horizontal codebook of the same number of antenna ports in Rel-8, Rel-9 or Rel-10, or may be larger than the same antenna port in Rel-8, Rel-9 or Rel-10
  • the number of feedback bits of the codebook is not limited here.
  • the number of bits required to feed back the second codebook W2 may be the same as the number of feedback bits of the codebook of the same number of antenna ports in Rel-8, Rel-9 or Rel-10, or may be greater than Rel-8, Rel-9 or Rel
  • the number of feedback bits of the codebook of the same number of antenna ports in the -10 is not limited herein.
  • the receiving device feeds back to the transmitting device the order of the first codebook W1 constituting the 3D codebook and the second codebook W2 without increasing the number of feedback bits.
  • the order is such that the transmitting device obtains the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2, thereby determining the 3D codebook W by directly integrating the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of Embodiment 2 of a method for determining a precoding matrix indication according to the present invention.
  • the executor of this embodiment is a transmitting device, which may be a base station or a UE.
  • the sending device is a base station
  • the receiving device may be a UE.
  • the sending device is a UE
  • the receiving device may be a base station.
  • the method in this embodiment may include:
  • Step 401 The sending device sends a reference signal to the receiving device.
  • the type of the reference signal may be a Channel State Information Reference Signal (CSI RS), a Demodulation Reference Signal (Demodulation RS, DM RS ), or a Cell-Specific Reference Signal (CRS).
  • CSI can also include Channel Quality Indicator/Index (CQI).
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • the reference signal is obtained in the corresponding resource or the subframe, which is not limited by the embodiment of the present invention.
  • Step 402 The sending device receives channel state indication information sent by the receiving device.
  • Step 403 The sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, a precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from a codebook based on a reference signal, where the precoding matrix W is a product of two matrices W1 and W2. Or direct product, wherein the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
  • the first codebook W1 may be a codebook that represents a horizontal antenna
  • the second codebook W2 may be a codebook that represents a vertical antenna.
  • the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 are selected, the first codebook W1 representing the horizontal direction can be selected as the codebook with higher order, and the second codebook W2 representing the vertical direction can be selected. It is a codebook with a lower order. Specifically, it is assumed that the 3D codebook to be constructed, that is, the order of the precoding matrix W is R, the order of the first codebook W1 is s, and the order of the second codebook W2 is t, then s ⁇ t is defined.
  • the 3D codebook of order 6 is W
  • W is the direct product of W1 and W2
  • first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 are respectively selected from a 2-antenna codebook, a 4-antenna codebook or an 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the matrix W1 may be a matrix representing broadband channel characteristics, and the matrix W2 may be a matrix representing channel characteristics of subbands; or, the matrix W1 may be a matrix representing long-term channel characteristics, and the matrix W2 may be a matrix representing short-term channel characteristics. .
  • the first codebook W1 may be a 3rd order Rel-10 codebook
  • the second codebook W2 may be a 2nd order Rel-10 codebook. this.
  • the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 may be limited to 1. That is, the 3D codebook of any order (set to R order) can be vertically oriented The second codebook W2 of the 1st order and the direct product of the first codebook W1 codebook whose horizontal direction is the Rth order are generated.
  • the sending device may obtain a precoding matrix ⁇ of the antenna array of the receiving device according to the relationship between the PMI and the precoding matrix specified in the 3GPP according to the track state indication information.
  • the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the received channel state indication information, and the precoding matrix w selected by the transmitting device is represented by a direct product or a product of the horizontal first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 representing the vertical direction, so that the characteristics of the three-dimensional beam vector can be expressed in the codebook, and thus the precoding matrix W can be used as a 3D code
  • the precoding matrix W can be used as a 3D code
  • the order Rank(W1) of the first codebook W1 to be greater than or equal to the order Rank(W2) of the second codebook W2, so that the 3D codebook W conforms to the antenna in the vertical direction.
  • the angle is smaller than the horizontal expansion angle.
  • the transmitting device performs precoding based on the precoding matrix selected from the codebook structure of the present invention fed back by the receiving device, which can effectively Improve the accuracy of precoding, thereby reducing performance loss and increasing system throughput.
  • the sending device receives channel state indication information sent by the receiving device, and step 403, the sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information,
  • the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal can be implemented in the following six manners.
  • the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
  • the determining, by the sending device, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, according to the channel state indication information includes:
  • Step 1 The sending device determines the order of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order.
  • Step 2 The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
  • the sending device and the receiving device need to agree on a preset rule in advance, or pre-agreed the mapping relationship between the indicator indicated by the precoding matrix and the codebook order. Therefore, when the receiving device feeds back the channel state indication information, Can not directly feedback the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 The order, but only the indicator i a of the precoding matrix indication of the first codebook W1 and the indicator i e of the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 need to be fed back, and the transmitting device receives the ⁇ and After i e , the order of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 may be implicitly obtained, so that the number of bits of the channel state indication information transmitted by the receiving device to the transmitting device is not increased.
  • the indicator indicated by the precoding matrix may be the indicator i after all the codebooks concatenated, for example, the codebook indicator of order 1 is 0 to Il-l, the codebook indicator of order 2 is il-1 to il+i2-2, where il is the number of codebooks of layer 1, and i2 is the number of codebooks of layer 2, and so on.
  • the codebook number of the codebook of the order is cascaded, and then the mapping relationship between the horizontal codebook indicator and the corresponding order can be established, as shown in Table 1 above, and the vertical codebook indicator and the corresponding order
  • the mapping relationship is as shown in Table 2 above.
  • the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, and a channel a quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and a total order of the precoding matrix W.
  • the sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, and includes:
  • Step 1 The sending device determines the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 according to the order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • Step 2 The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
  • the method may include:
  • the receiving device jointly encodes the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook with the order Rank (W1 ) of the first codebook W1, and the second codebook W2
  • the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix is jointly encoded with the CQI.
  • the channel state indication information may include: a first code indicating a precoding matrix corresponding to the indicator of the present i a, i e the second indicator code indicating the precoding matrix W2 is present, the The CQI, the order Rank of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2), and the total order of the precoding matrix W.
  • the sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the receiving device in step 403.
  • the precoding matrix w selected from the codebook based on the reference signal includes:
  • Step 1 The transmitting device determines the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 according to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • Step 2 The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
  • the method may include:
  • the receiving device jointly encodes the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the second codebook with the order Rank (W2 ) of the second codebook W2, and the first codebook W1 is
  • the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix is jointly encoded with the CQI.
  • the channel state indication information may include: a combination of the combination of the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) value.
  • the combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 may be represented by various quantized values, for example, for a total order of 6.
  • the sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, according to the channel state indication information, including:
  • Step 1 The sending device determines the first codebook W1 according to the combined quantized value of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
  • Step 2 The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
  • the channel state indication information is not only the quantized value including the combination of the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2), It may also include: a total order of the precoding matrix w.
  • the first code determined by the transmitting device to further verify a combined quantized value according to a combination of the order Rank(W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank(W2) of the second codebook W2 The correctness of the order Rank of the W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2).
  • the channel state indication information includes: an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
  • the receiving device does not feed back the total order of the precoding matrix W, but directly feeds back the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2,
  • the transmitting device receives the channel state indication information, and obtains the total order of the precoding matrix W according to Rank (Wl) XRank (W2).
  • the sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, including:
  • the transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
  • the channel state indication information may include: a total order of the precoding matrix W.
  • the sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, including:
  • Step 1 The sending device determines, according to the total order of the precoding matrix W and the antenna configuration information of the sending device, the order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2.
  • the order of Rank (W2) includes: a first day line port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type;
  • Step 2 The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
  • the sending device may determine the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (Wl) and the second codebook W2 according to the horizontal number of the transmitting device and the number of the vertical antenna ports.
  • Order Rank (W2) may be determined according to the horizontal number of the transmitting device and the number of the vertical antenna ports.
  • the foregoing six types of sending devices receive the channel state indication information sent by the receiving device, and the sending device determines any one of the manners of the precoding matrix W according to the indication information, and feeds back the first codebook W1.
  • the number of bits can be the same as the antenna port in Rel-8, Rel-9 or Rel-10
  • the number of feedback bits of the codebook of the same number is the same, and may be greater than the number of feedback bits of the codebook of the same number of antenna ports in Rel-8, Rel-9, or Rel-10, which is not limited herein.
  • the number of bits required to feed back the second codebook W2 to feed back the first codebook W1 may be the same as the number of feedback bits of the codebook of the same number of antenna ports in Rel-8, Rel-9 or Rel-10,
  • the number of feedback bits of the codebook that can be greater than the number of the same antenna port in Rel-8, Rel-9, or Rel-10 is not limited herein.
  • the receiving device feeds back to the transmitting device the order of the first codebook W1 constituting the 3D codebook and the second codebook W2 without increasing the number of feedback bits.
  • the order whereby the transmitting device obtains the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2, and the transmitting device determines the 3D codebook w by directly integrating the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a receiving device according to the present invention.
  • the receiving device in this embodiment may be a base station or a terminal.
  • the receiving device 500 of this embodiment may include: a receiving module 11 and a sending module 12, where
  • the receiving module 11 may be configured to select a precoding matrix W from the codebook based on a reference signal sent by the sending device, where the precoding matrix W is a product or a direct product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2. ,
  • the order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), is greater than or equal to the order of the second codebook W2 (W2);
  • the sending module 12 may be configured to send channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information.
  • the receiving device of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and the implementation principle thereof is similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the receiving device of this embodiment selects the precoding matrix W from the codebook based on the reference signal transmitted by the transmitting device, by using the first codebook W1 representing the horizontal direction and the second codebook W2 representing the vertical codebook. Constructed to be able to represent the characteristics of the three-dimensional beam vector in the codebook, so the constructed precoding matrix W can be used as a 3-dimensional (3D) codebook; and by defining the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, such that the constructed 3D codebook W conforms to the characteristic that the 3D channel is smaller than the horizontal expansion angle at the vertical expansion angle, and thus, the constructed The accuracy of the 3D codebook is high. Therefore, the transmitting device performs precoding based on the precoding matrix selected from the codebook structure of the present invention fed back by the receiving device, which can effectively improve the precision of the precoding, thereby reducing performance loss and improving the throughput of the system.
  • this embodiment may also have the following six specific implementation manners.
  • the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
  • the sending module 12 can be specifically used to:
  • the sending device determines the first code according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order
  • the order of the W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 are determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, and a channel a quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the sending module 12 can be specifically configured to:
  • the sending device determines the second according to the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the total order of the precoding matrix W.
  • the order of the codebook W2 is Rank (W2), and the precoding matrix W is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a receiving device according to the present invention.
  • the receiving device 600 of the present embodiment based on the receiving device shown in FIG. 5, further includes: an encoding module 13 for the second specific implementation manner.
  • the encoding module 13 may be configured to: before the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the indicator indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook and the first codebook W1
  • the order Rank (W1) is jointly coded, and the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 is jointly encoded with the CQI.
  • the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total of the precoding matrix W Order;
  • the sending module 12 can be specifically configured to:
  • the sending device determines the first according to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W
  • the order of the codebook W1 is Rank (W1)
  • the precoding matrix W is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the third implementation manner may also adopt the structure of the receiving device shown in FIG. 6, that is, the method further includes: an encoding module 13,
  • the encoding module 13 is configured to: after the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the second codebook and the second The order Rank (W2) of the codebook W2 is jointly encoded, and the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 is jointly encoded with the CQI.
  • the channel state indication information may include: a combination of the order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the order of the second codebook, W2, Rank (W2) Value
  • the sending module 12 can be specifically configured to:
  • the combined quantized value determines the order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the order of the second codebook W2, and according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook
  • the order of W2 determines the precoding matrix W.
  • the channel state indication information may be in addition to the quantized value including the combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
  • the method includes: a total order of the precoding matrix W.
  • the first code determined by the transmitting device to further verify a combined quantized value according to the combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2
  • the channel state indication information may include: an order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
  • the sending module 12 can be specifically configured to: And transmitting the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information may include: a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the sending module 12 can be specifically configured to:
  • the antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type.
  • the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 may be selected from a 2-antenna codebook, a 4-antenna codebook, or an 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, respectively.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a transmitting device according to the present invention.
  • the transmitting device in this embodiment may be a base station or a terminal.
  • the transmitting device 700 of this embodiment may include: a sending module 21, a receiving module 22, and a processing module 23, where
  • the sending module 21 can be configured to send a reference signal to the receiving device.
  • the receiving module 22 may be configured to receive the channel state indication information sent by the receiving device, where the processing module 23 may be configured to determine, according to the channel state indication information, a precoding matrix selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal. W, wherein the precoding matrix W is a product or a direct product of two matrices W1 and W2,
  • the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
  • the sending device of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and the implementation principle is similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the transmitting device of this embodiment determines, according to the received channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, because the precoding matrix W selected by the transmitting device is representative of the horizontal direction.
  • the first codebook W1 and the codebook representing the vertical direction are second The product or direct product of the codebook W2, so that the characteristics of the three-dimensional beam vector can be expressed in the codebook, so the precoding matrix W can be used as a 3D codebook; and by defining the order Rank of the first codebook W1 ( W1) is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, such that the 3D codebook W conforms to the characteristic that the 3D channel is smaller than the horizontal expansion angle at the vertical expansion angle, and therefore, the 3D codebook The accuracy is high. Therefore, the transmitting device performs precoding based on the precoding matrix selected from the codebook structure of the present invention fed back by the receiving device, which can effectively improve the accuracy of precoding, thereby reducing
  • the channel state indication information includes: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
  • the processing module 23 can be specifically used to:
  • Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information includes: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, and a channel quality An information indicator CQI, an order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the processing module 23 can be specifically configured to:
  • Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the processing module 23 can be specifically configured to:
  • Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information includes: a combined quantized value of the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2)
  • the processing module 23 can be specifically configured to:
  • the precoding matrix w selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information may be in addition to the quantized value including the combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
  • the method includes: a total order of the precoding matrix W.
  • the first code determined by the transmitting device to further verify a combined quantized value according to the combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2
  • the channel state indication information may include: an order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
  • the processing module 23 can be specifically configured to:
  • Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information may include: a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the processing module 23 can be specifically configured to:
  • the antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type;
  • the device Determining the receiving according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2
  • the device is based on the precoding matrix w selected from the codebook based on the reference signal.
  • the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 are respectively selected from a 2-antenna codebook, a 4-antenna codebook or an 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a hardware structure of a receiving device according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention.
  • the receiving device in this embodiment may be a base station or a terminal.
  • the receiving device 800 of this embodiment may include: a receiver 801 and a transmitter 802.
  • the receiving device may further include a processor 803 and a memory 804.
  • the receiver 801, the transmitter 802, the processor 803, and the memory 804 may be connected through a system bus or the like.
  • the system bus is connected as an example; the system bus may be an ISA bus, a PCI bus, or an EISA bus.
  • the system bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of representation, only one line is shown in Figure 8, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the receiver 801 may be configured to select a precoding matrix W from the codebook based on a reference signal sent by the sending device, where the precoding matrix W is a product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 or Direct product,
  • the order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), is greater than or equal to the second codebook.
  • the transmitter 802 is configured to send channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information.
  • the receiving device of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and the implementation principle thereof is similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the receiving device of this embodiment selects the precoding matrix W from the codebook based on the reference signal transmitted by the transmitting device, by using the first codebook W1 representing the horizontal direction and the second codebook W2 representing the vertical codebook. Constructed to be able to represent the characteristics of the three-dimensional beam vector in the codebook, so the constructed precoding matrix W can be used as a 3-dimensional (3D) codebook; and by defining the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, such that the constructed 3D codebook W conforms to the characteristic that the 3D channel is smaller than the horizontal expansion angle at the vertical expansion angle, and thus, the constructed The accuracy of the 3D codebook is high. Therefore, the transmitting device performs precoding based on the precoding matrix selected from the codebook structure of the present invention fed back by the receiving device, which can effectively improve the accuracy of the precoding, thereby reducing performance loss. High system throughput.
  • the receiving device of this embodiment may also have the following six specific implementation manners.
  • the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
  • the transmitter 802 can be specifically configured to:
  • the sending device determines the first code according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order
  • the order of the W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 are determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, and a channel a quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the transmitter 802 can be specifically configured to:
  • the sending device determines the second according to the order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the total order of the precoding matrix W.
  • the order of the codebook W2 is Rank (W2), and the precoding matrix W is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2;
  • the processor 803 may be configured to: after the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook and the first code
  • the order Rank (W1) of the W1 is jointly encoded, and the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 is jointly encoded with the CQI.
  • the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the transmitter 802 can be specifically configured to:
  • the sending device determines the first according to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W
  • the order of the two codebooks W2 determines the precoding matrix W.
  • the processor 803 may be configured to: after the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the second codebook and the first The order Rank (W2) of the two codebooks W2 is jointly coded, and the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 is jointly encoded with the CQI.
  • the channel state indication information may include: a combination of the combination of the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) Value
  • the transmitter 802 can be specifically configured to:
  • the combined quantized value determines an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, and according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the The order of the second codebook W2 determines the precoding matrix W.
  • the channel state indication information includes an order of the first codebook W1
  • the total order of the precoding matrix W may also be included.
  • the first code determined by the transmitting device to further verify a combined quantized value according to a combination of the order Rank(W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank(W2) of the second codebook W2 The correctness of the order Rank of the W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2).
  • the channel state indication information may include: an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
  • the transmitter 802 can be specifically configured to:
  • the channel state indication information may include: a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the transmitter 802 can be specifically configured to:
  • the sending device determines the first codebook according to a total order of the precoding matrix W and antenna configuration information of the receiving device.
  • the precoding matrix W, wherein the antenna configuration information of the transmitting device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type.
  • the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 may be selected from a 2-antenna codebook, a 4-antenna codebook, or an 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, respectively.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of the second embodiment of the sending device of the present invention.
  • the sending device in this embodiment may be a base station or a terminal.
  • the transmitting device 900 of this embodiment may include: a transmitter 901, a receiver 902, and a processor 903.
  • the receiving device may further include a memory 904.
  • the transmitter 901, the receiver 902, the processor 903, and the memory 903 can be connected through a system bus or the like.
  • the system bus is connected as an example; the system bus can be an ISA bus, a PCI bus, or an EISA bus.
  • the system bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of representation, only one line is shown in Figure 9, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus. among them,
  • the transmitter 901 is configured to send a reference signal to the receiving device.
  • the receiver 902 may be configured to receive the channel state indication information that is sent by the receiving device, where the processor 903 may be configured to determine, according to the channel state indication information, a precoding matrix selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal. W, wherein the precoding matrix W is a direct product or a product of two matrices W1 and W2,
  • the order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
  • the sending device of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and the implementation principle is similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the transmitting device of this embodiment determines, according to the received channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, because the precoding matrix W selected by the transmitting device is representative of the horizontal direction. a direct product or a product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 representing the vertical codebook, so that the characteristics of the three-dimensional beam vector can be expressed in the codebook, and thus the precoding matrix W can be used as a 3D codebook;
  • the order Rank (Wl) is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, such that the 3D codebook W conforms to the characteristic that the 3D channel is smaller than the horizontal expansion angle at the vertical expansion angle, and therefore, The accuracy of the 3D codebook is high. Therefore, the transmitting device performs precoding based on the precoding matrix selected from the codebook structure of the present invention fed back by the receiving device, which can effectively improve the accuracy of the precoding, thereby reducing
  • the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
  • the processor 903 can be specifically used to:
  • Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, and a channel a quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the processor 903 can be specifically configured to:
  • Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the processor 903 can be specifically configured to:
  • the device Determining the receiving according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2
  • the device is based on the precoding matrix w selected from the codebook based on the reference signal.
  • the channel state indication information includes: a combined quantized value of the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2)
  • the processor 903 can be specifically configured to:
  • the combined quantized value of Rank (W2) determines the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
  • Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information includes an order of the first codebook W1
  • the total order of the precoding matrix W may also be included.
  • the first code determined by the transmitting device to further verify a combined quantized value according to a combination of the order Rank(W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank(W2) of the second codebook W2 The correctness of the order Rank of the W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2).
  • the channel state indication information may include: an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
  • the processor 903 can be specifically configured to:
  • Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the channel state indication information may include: a total order of the precoding matrix W;
  • the processor 903 can be specifically configured to:
  • the antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type;
  • Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
  • the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 The two antenna codebooks, the four antenna codebooks, or the eight antenna codebooks of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system are respectively selected.
  • 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a communication system according to the present invention.
  • the system 1000 of the present embodiment includes: a receiving device and a transmitting device, where the receiving device can adopt the structure of the device embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3 can be performed, and the sending device can adopt the structure of the device embodiment shown in FIG. 9 , and correspondingly, the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4 can be executed, and the implementation principle thereof is implemented. Similar to the technical effect, it will not be described here.
  • the aforementioned program can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the program when executed, performs the steps including the foregoing method embodiments; and the foregoing storage medium includes: a medium that can store program codes, such as a ROM, a RAM, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Radio Transmission System (AREA)

Abstract

Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for determining a precoding matrix indication, a receiving device, and a sending device. The method for determining a precoding matrix indication comprises: a receiving device selecting a precoding matrix W from a codebook according to a reference signal sent by a sending device, the precoding matrix W being a product or a direct product a first codebook W1 and a second codebook W2, and a rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 being greater than or equal to a rank (W2) of the second codebook W2; and the receiving device sending channel sate indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information. The method for determining a precoding matrix indication, the receiving device and the sending device in the embodiments of the present invention can improve the precision of precoding, thereby improving the throughput of a system.

Description

确定预编码矩阵指示的方法、 接收设备和发送设备  Method for determining precoding matrix indication, receiving device and transmitting device
技术领域 Technical field
本发明实施例涉及通信技术领域, 尤其涉及一种确定预编码矩阵指示的 方法、 接收设备和发送设备。 背景技术  The embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a method, a receiving device, and a sending device for determining a precoding matrix indication. Background technique
在无线通信网络中, 通过发射预编码技术和接收合并技术, 多入多出 ( Multiple Input Multiple Output, MIMO ) 无线通信系统可以得到分集和 阵列增益。 利用预编码的系统可以表示为  In a wireless communication network, diversity and array gain can be obtained by a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) wireless communication system through a transmit precoding technique and a receive combining technique. Systems that use precoding can be expressed as
y = HVs + N  y = HVs + N
其中, y是接收信号矢量, H是信道矩阵, 是预编码矩阵, s是发射 的符号矢量, N是测量噪声。  Where y is the received signal vector, H is the channel matrix, is the precoding matrix, s is the transmitted symbol vector, and N is the measurement noise.
最优预编码通常需要发射机完全已知信道状态信息 (Channel State Information, CSI ) 。 常用的方法是用户设备 (User Equipment, UE ) 对瞬 时 CSI进行量化并报告给基站, 通常, 接收设备 (例如 UE ) 可以基于发 送设备 (例如基站) 发送的参考信号, 即接收信号矢量 y, 并根据已知的 预定义的发射导频信号 s的基础上,即发射的符号矢量 s,以及测量噪声 N , 也称为高斯白噪声, 根据公式: y = H s +n得到估计的信道矩阵 H , 再从 码本中选择与所述信道矩阵 H最匹配的预编码矩阵 , 使得数据实际传输 时的信道传输质量和速率较高。 Optimal precoding usually requires the transmitter to fully know the Channel State Information (CSI). A commonly used method is that the user equipment (UE) quantizes and reports the instantaneous CSI to the base station. Generally, the receiving device (for example, the UE) can receive the signal vector y based on the reference signal sent by the sending device (for example, the base station), and Based on the known pre-defined transmitted pilot signal s, ie the transmitted symbol vector s, and the measured noise N, also known as Gaussian white noise, the estimated channel matrix H is obtained according to the formula: y = H s + n And selecting a precoding matrix that best matches the channel matrix H from the codebook, so that the channel transmission quality and rate when the data is actually transmitted is higher.
其中用户设备包括移动台 (Mobile Station, MS ) 、 中继 (Relay) 、 移动电话 (Mobile Telephone ) 、 手机 (handset) 及便携设备 (portable equipment) 等, 基站包括节点 B (NodeB ) 基站 (Base station, BS ) , 接 入点(Access Point),发射点(Transmission Point, TP ),演进节点 B( Evolved Node B , eNB )或者中继(Relay)等。现有长期演进(Long Term Evolution, LTE) 系统报告的 CSI信息包括秩指示 (Rank Indicator, RI ) 、 预编码矩 阵指示(Precoding Matrix Indicator, PMI )和信道质量指示(Channel Quality Indicator, CQI ) 信息等, 其中, RI和 PMI分别指示使用的传输层数和预 编码矩阵。其中, 预编码矩阵指示 PMI和预编码矩阵的对应关系详见第三 代合作伙伴项目(3rd Generation Partnership Project,简称: 3GPP) TS 36.213 中, 每个复值组成元素的预编码矩阵与码本表格中的一个指示号 (预编码 矩阵指示 PMI) 相对应。 通常称所使用的预编码矩阵的集合为码本, 其中 的每个预编码矩阵为码本中的码字。 The user equipment includes a mobile station (MS), a relay, a mobile telephone, a handset, and a portable device. The base station includes a Node B (NodeB) base station (Base station). , BS), Access Point, Transmission Point (TP), Evolved Node B (eNB) or Relay (Relay). The CSI information reported by the existing Long Term Evolution (LTE) system includes a Rank Indicator (RI), a Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI), and a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) information. , where RI and PMI indicate the number of transport layers used and Encoding matrix. The precoding matrix indicates the correspondence between the PMI and the precoding matrix. For details, refer to the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) TS 36.213, the precoding matrix and the codebook table of each complex value component. One of the indicator numbers (precoding matrix indicates PMI) corresponds. A set of precoding matrices used is generally referred to as a codebook, where each precoding matrix is a codeword in a codebook.
图 1为一维线阵天线的结构示意图, 如图 1所示线阵天线的分布只包 括一个方向,该方向通常称为水平向。图 2为二维面阵天线的结构示意图, 如图 2所示, 二维面阵天线的分布包括水平向和垂直向两个方向。 当天线 规模从一维线阵扩展到水平、 垂直二维面阵时, 码本需要设计为水平、 垂 直联合的三维 (3D) 码本 W。 其中一种 3D码本 W采用水平码本 W1和 垂直码本 W2直积的形式, BP : W = W\ ®W2 , 或采用第一码本 Wl和第二 码本 W2乘积的形式, g卩: W = WlxW2, 其中, Wl = Wal ® Wel,W2 = Wa2 ®We2, Wal为构成 W1的水平向码本, Wel为构成 W1的垂直向码本, Wa2为构成 W2的水平向码本, We2为构成 W2的垂直向码本。 。 但是, 如何确定第一 码本 W1和第二码本 W2分别的阶数, 以使得 3D码本准确地模拟二维面 阵天线的特性。 gP, 现有的确定二维面阵天线的 3D码本的方法精度较低, 从而造成性能损失较大, 系统的吞吐量也较低。 发明内容 FIG. 1 is a schematic structural view of a one-dimensional linear array antenna. The distribution of the linear array antenna shown in FIG. 1 includes only one direction, which is generally referred to as a horizontal direction. 2 is a schematic structural view of a two-dimensional array antenna. As shown in FIG. 2, the distribution of the two-dimensional array antenna includes two directions of horizontal direction and vertical direction. When the antenna size is extended from a one-dimensional line array to a horizontal and vertical two-dimensional area array, the codebook needs to be designed as a horizontal, vertical combined three-dimensional (3D) codebook W. One of the 3D codebooks W is in the form of a direct product of the horizontal codebook W1 and the vertical codebook W2, BP : W = W\ ® W2 , or a product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2, g卩: W = WlxW2, wherein, Wl = W al ® W el , W2 = W a2 ®W e2, W al constituting level codebook to W1, W el constituting W1 perpendicular to the codebook, W a2 constituting W2 The horizontal direction codebook, W e2 is the vertical codebook constituting W2. . However, how to determine the order of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2, respectively, so that the 3D codebook accurately simulates the characteristics of the two-dimensional array antenna. gP, the existing method for determining the 3D codebook of the two-dimensional area array antenna has lower precision, resulting in a large performance loss and a lower system throughput. Summary of the invention
本发明实施例提供一种确定预编码矩阵指示的方法、 接收设备和发送设 备, 以克服现有技术的确定二维面阵天线的 3D码本的方法精度较低, 进而 导致的预编码精度低的问题。  The embodiment of the present invention provides a method for determining a precoding matrix indication, a receiving device, and a transmitting device, to overcome the prior art method for determining a 3D codebook of a two-dimensional area array antenna, which has low precision, and thus has low precoding precision. The problem.
第一方面, 本发明实施例提供一种确定预编码矩阵指示的方法, 包括: 接收设备基于发送设备发送的参考信号, 从码本中选择预编码矩阵 W, 其中, 所述预编码矩阵 W为第一码本 W1和第二码本 W2的直积或乘积, 其中, 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a method for determining a precoding matrix indication, including: a receiving device, according to a reference signal sent by a sending device, selecting a precoding matrix W from a codebook, where the precoding matrix W is a direct product or a product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2, wherein the order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2) ;
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  The receiving device sends channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information.
在第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式中,第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank(W2 ) 为 1。 In a first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the order of the second codebook W2 is Rank (W2) Is 1.
根据第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第二种可能的实 现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示的 指示符 ia和第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie; According to a first aspect or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, in a second possible implementation, the channel state indication information comprising: a first precoding matrix indicator indicator codebook W1 i a And an indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W, 包括:  The receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information, including:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据预设的规则或预设的预编码矩阵指示的指示符与码本阶数的映射 关系分别确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数, 并根据 所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  The receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines, according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order. Determining the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, and determining the precoding matrix according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 W.
根据第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第三种可能的实 现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的 指示符 ia、第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、信道质量信息指示符 CQI、 所述第一码本 Wl的阶数 Rank (Wl )和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; 所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W, 包括: According to the first aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a third possible implementation, the channel state indication information includes: an indicator indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook i a And an indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a channel quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank (W1 ) of the first codebook W1, and a total order of the precoding matrix W; The receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information, including:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总 阶数确定所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的 阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  Sending, by the receiving device, the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the total order of the precoding matrix W. The order of the second codebook W2 is Rank (W2), and the precoding matrix W is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
根据第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 在第四种可能的实现方式中, 在所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息之前, 包括:  According to a third possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a fourth possible implementation, before the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the method includes:
所述接收设备将所述第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia与所述 第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl )进行联合编码, 将所述第二码本 W2的预编 码矩阵指示的指示符 ie与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 The receiving device jointly encodes the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook with the order Rank (W1 ) of the first codebook W1, and the second codebook W2 The indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix is jointly encoded with the CQI.
根据第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第五种可能的实 现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的 指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 所述 CQI、 所述第二 码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; According to the first aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a fifth possible implementation, the channel state indication information includes: an indicator indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook i a An indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, the CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 w, 包括: 所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总 阶数确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的 阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 The receiving device sends channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device Determining the precoding matrix w according to the channel state indication information, including: the receiving device sending the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device is configured according to the second codebook W2 The order Rank (W2) and the total order of the precoding matrix W determine the order Rank(W1) of the first codebook W1, and according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the second The order of the codebook W2 determines the precoding matrix W.
根据第一方面的第五种可能的实现方式, 在第六种可能的实现方式中, 在所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息之前, 包括:  According to the fifth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a sixth possible implementation, before the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the method includes:
所述接收设备将所述第二码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie与所述 第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 )进行联合编码, 将所述第一码本 W1的预编 码矩阵指示的指示符 ia与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 The receiving device jointly encodes the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the second codebook with the order Rank (W2 ) of the second codebook W2, and the first codebook W1 is The indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix is jointly encoded with the CQI.
根据第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第七种可能的实 现方式中,  According to the first aspect or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, in a seventh possible implementation,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值;  The channel state indication information includes: a quantized value of a combination of an order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W, 包括:  The receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information, including:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 Wl的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所 述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的阶数和所述 第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  The receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device is based on the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 The combined quantized value of (W2) determines the order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, and according to the order of the first codebook W1 The number and the order of the second codebook W2 determine the precoding matrix W.
根据第一方面的第七种可能的实现方式, 在第八种可能的实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息还包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数;  According to the seventh possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the eighth possible implementation, the channel state indication information further includes: a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 Wl的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所 述第二码本 W2的阶数, 包括:  The receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device is based on the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 The combined quantized value of (W2) determines the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (Wl) and the order of the second codebook W2, including:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的组合的量化值和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述第一码 本 Wl的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数。 The receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device is based on the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 The combined value of (W2) and the total order of the precoding matrix W determine the first code The order of the W1 Rank (Wl) and the order of the second codebook W2.
根据第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第九种可能的实 现方式中,  According to the first aspect or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, in a ninth possible implementation,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank ( W2 );  The channel state indication information includes: an order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W, 包括:  The receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information, including:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码 矩阵 w。  The receiving device sends channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix w according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2. .
根据第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第十种可能的实 现方式中,  According to the first aspect or the first possible implementation of the first aspect, in a tenth possible implementation,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述预编码矩阵 w的总阶数。;  The channel state indication information includes: a total order of the precoding matrix w. ;
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W, 包括:  The receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the indication information, including:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述预编码矩阵 w的总阶数和所述发送设备的天线配置信息确定 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank(Wl )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank(W2), 并根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码 矩阵 W, 其中, 所述发送设备的天线配置信息包括: 第一天线端口数、 第二 天线端口数和天线的极化类型。  The receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the first codebook according to a total order of the precoding matrix w and antenna configuration information of the sending device. The order Rank of the W1, Rank (W1), and the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2), and determine the number according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2. The precoding matrix W, wherein the antenna configuration information of the transmitting device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type.
根据第一方面、 第一方面的第一种至第十种可能的实现方式中的任意一 种, 在第十一种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一码本 W1 和所述第二码本 W2 分别从长期演进 LTE系统的 2天线码本、 4天线码本或者 8天线码本中选取。  According to the first aspect, any one of the first to the tenth possible implementation manners of the first aspect, in the eleventh possible implementation manner, the first codebook W1 and the second code The W2 is selected from the 2-antenna codebook, the 4-antenna codebook, or the 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, respectively.
第二方面, 本发明实施例提供一种确定预编码矩阵指示的方法, 包括: 发送设备向接收设备发送参考信号;  In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a method for determining a precoding matrix indication, including: sending, by a sending device, a reference signal to a receiving device;
所述发送设备接收所述接收设备发送的信道状态指示信息;  Receiving, by the sending device, channel state indication information sent by the receiving device;
所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考信 号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 其中, 所述预编码矩阵 W为两个矩阵 W1 和 W2的乘积或直积, 其中, 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。 Determining, by the sending device, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the channel state indication information, where the precoding matrix W is a product or a direct product of two matrices W1 and W2 , The order Rank (W1 ) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
在第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式中,第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank( W2 ) 为 1。  In a first possible implementation of the second aspect, the second rank W2 has a rank Rank (W2) of 1.
根据第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第二种可能的实 现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示的 指示符 ia和第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie; According to a second aspect, the first possible implementation of the second aspect, in a second possible implementation, the channel state indication information comprising: a first precoding matrix indicator indicator codebook W1 i a And an indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考信 号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括:  Determining, by the sending device, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the channel state indication information, including:
所述发送设备根据预设的规则或预设的预编码矩阵指示的指示符与码本 阶数的映射关系分别确定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶 数;  Determining, by the sending device, the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order Number
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
根据第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第三种可能的实 现方式中,  According to the second aspect or the first possible implementation of the second aspect, in a third possible implementation manner,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 信道质量信息指示符 CQI、 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; The channel state indication information includes: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a channel quality information indicator CQI, the foregoing An order Rank of a codebook W1 (W1) and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考信 号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括:  Determining, by the sending device, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the channel state indication information, including:
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述预编码 矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  The transmitting device determines the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 according to the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
根据第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第四种可能的实 现方式中,  According to the second aspect or the first possible implementation of the second aspect, in a fourth possible implementation,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 所述 CQI、 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; 所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考信 号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括: The channel state indication information includes: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, the CQI, and the second codebook The order Rank of W2 (W2) and the total order of the precoding matrix W; Determining, by the sending device, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the channel state indication information, including:
所述发送设备根据所述第二码本 W2 的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 和所述预编码 矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 );  The transmitting device determines the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 according to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
根据第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第五种可能的实 现方式中,  According to the second aspect or the first possible implementation of the second aspect, in a fifth possible implementation,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值;  The channel state indication information includes: a quantized value of a combination of an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考信 号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括:  Determining, by the sending device, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the channel state indication information, including:
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码 本 W2的阶数 Rank( W2)的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  The transmitting device determines the order of the first codebook W1 according to the combined quantized value of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 Rank (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 Rank (W2);
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
根据第二方面的第五种可能的实现方式, 在第六种可能的实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息还包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数;  According to a fifth possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a sixth possible implementation, the channel state indication information further includes: a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码 本 W2的阶数 Rank( W2)的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2), 包括:  The transmitting device determines the order of the first codebook W1 according to the combined quantized value of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 Rank (W1) and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, including:
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码 本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确 定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2 的阶数 Rank (W2) o  The transmitting device is based on a combination of the quantization value of the combination of the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) and the total order of the precoding matrix W Determining the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) o
根据第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第七种可能的实 现方式中,  According to the second aspect or the first possible implementation of the second aspect, in a seventh possible implementation,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank ( W2 ); 所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考信 号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括: The channel state indication information includes: an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2; Determining, by the sending device, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the channel state indication information, including:
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
根据第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第八种可能的实 现方式中,  According to the second aspect or the first possible implementation of the second aspect, in an eighth possible implementation,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数;  The channel state indication information includes: a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考信 号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括:  Determining, by the sending device, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the channel state indication information, including:
所述发送设备根据所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数和所述发送设备的天线配 置信息确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) o 其中, 所述发送设备的天线配置信息包括: 第一天线端口数、 第二天线端口数和天线的极化类型;  Determining, by the transmitting device, the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 according to a total order of the precoding matrix W and antenna configuration information of the transmitting device Rank (W2) o, wherein the antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type;
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
根据第二方面、 第二方面的第一种至第八种可能的实现方式中的任意一 种, 在第九种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一码本 W1和所述第二码本 W2分 别从长期演进 LTE系统的 2天线码本、 4天线码本或者 8天线码本中选取。  According to the second aspect, any one of the first to the eighth possible implementation manners of the second aspect, in the ninth possible implementation manner, the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 is selected from a 2-antenna codebook, a 4-antenna codebook, or an 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, respectively.
第三方面, 本发明实施例提供一种接收设备, 包括:  In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a receiving device, including:
接收模块, 用于基于发送设备发送的参考信号, 从码本中选择预编码矩 阵 W, 其中, 所述预编码矩阵 W为第一码本 W1和第二码本 W2的乘积或直 积,  a receiving module, configured to select a precoding matrix W from the codebook based on a reference signal sent by the sending device, where the precoding matrix W is a product or a direct product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2.
其中, 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  The order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), is greater than or equal to the order of the second codebook W2 (W2);
发送模块, 用于向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送 设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  And a sending module, configured to send channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information.
在第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式中,第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank( W2) 为 1。  In a first possible implementation of the third aspect, the second rank W2 has a rank Rank (W2) of one.
根据第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第二种可能的实 现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示的 指示符 ia和第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie; According to the third aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a second possible implementation manner, the channel state indication information includes: a precoding matrix indicated by the first codebook W1 An indicator i a of the indicator i a and the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
所述发送模块具体用于:  The sending module is specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据预 设的规则或预设的预编码矩阵指示的指示符与码本阶数的映射关系分别确定 所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数, 并根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  Transmitting the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the first code according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order The order of the W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 are determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
根据第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第三种可能的实 现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的 指示符 ia、第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、信道质量信息指示符 CQI、 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl )和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; 所述发送模块具体用于: According to the third aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a third possible implementation, the channel state indication information includes: an indicator indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook i a And an indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a channel quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank(W1) of the first codebook W1, and a total order of the precoding matrix W; The sending module is specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述 第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的阶数和所述第 二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  Transmitting, by the sending device, the channel state indication information, so that the sending device determines the second according to the order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the total order of the precoding matrix W. The order of the codebook W2 is Rank (W2), and the precoding matrix W is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
根据第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 在第四种可能的实现方式中, 还包括:  According to a third possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner, the method further includes:
编码模块, 用于在所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息 之前,将所述第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ^与所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 进行联合编码, 将所述第二码本 W2 的预编码矩阵指示 的指示符 ie与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 An encoding module, configured to: before the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the indicator indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook and the order of the first codebook W1 Rank (W1) performs joint coding, and jointly encodes the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 with the CQI.
根据第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第五种可能的实 现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的 指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 所述 CQI、 所述第二 码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; According to the third aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a fifth possible implementation, the channel state indication information includes: an indicator indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook i a An indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, the CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送模块具体用于:  The sending module is specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述 第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的阶数和所述第 二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 根据第三方面的第五种可能的实现方式, 在第六种可能的实现方式中, 还包括: Transmitting the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the first according to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W The order of the codebook W1 is Rank (W1), and the precoding matrix W is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2. According to the fifth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a sixth possible implementation manner, the method further includes:
编码模块, 用于在所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息 之前,将所述第二码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie与所述第二码本 W2 的阶数 Rank (W2) 进行联合编码, 将所述第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示 的指示符 ia与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 An encoding module, configured to: before the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the second codebook and the second codebook W2 The number Rank (W2) performs joint coding, and the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 is jointly encoded with the CQI.
根据第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第七种可能的实 现方式中,  According to the third aspect or the first possible implementation of the third aspect, in a seventh possible implementation,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值;  The channel state indication information includes: a quantized value of a combination of an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述发送模块具体用于:  The sending module is specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数,并根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定 所述预编码矩阵 W。  Transmitting the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device is based on the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) The combined quantized value determines the order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the order of the second codebook W2, and according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook The order of W2 determines the precoding matrix W.
根据第三方面的第七种可能的实现方式, 在第八种可能的实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息还包括: 所述预编码矩阵 w的总阶数;  According to the seventh possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in the eighth possible implementation, the channel state indication information further includes: a total order of the precoding matrix w;
所述发送模块具体用于:  The sending module is specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数。  Transmitting the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device is based on the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) The combined quantized value and the total order of the precoding matrix W determine the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2.
根据第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第九种可能的实 现方式中,  According to the third aspect or the first possible implementation of the third aspect, in a ninth possible implementation manner,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  The channel state indication information includes: an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述发送模块具体用于:  The sending module is specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所述第 一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 根据第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第十种可能的实 现方式中, And transmitting the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2. According to the third aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a tenth possible implementation manner,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述预编码矩阵 w的总阶数;  The channel state indication information includes: a total order of the precoding matrix w;
所述发送模块具体用于:  The sending module is specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数和所述发送设备的天线配置信息确定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2), 并根据所 述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W, 其中, 所述发送设备的天线配置信息包括: 第一天线端口数、 第二天线端口 数和天线的极化类型。  Sending the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the order of the first codebook W1 according to the total order of the precoding matrix W and the antenna configuration information of the sending device. Rank (W1) and the order Rank of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2), and determining the precoding matrix W according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 The antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type.
根据第三方面、 第三方面的第一种至第十种可能的实现方式中的任意一 种, 在第十一种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一码本 W1 和所述第二码本 W2 分别从长期演进 LTE系统的 2天线码本、 4天线码本或者 8天线码本中选取。  According to the third aspect, any one of the first to the tenth possible implementation manners of the third aspect, in the eleventh possible implementation manner, the first codebook W1 and the second code The W2 is selected from the 2-antenna codebook, the 4-antenna codebook, or the 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, respectively.
第四方面, 本发明实施例提供一种发送设备, 包括:  In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present invention provides a sending device, including:
发送模块, 用于向接收设备发送参考信号;  a sending module, configured to send a reference signal to the receiving device;
接收模块, 用于接收所述接收设备发送的信道状态指示信息;  a receiving module, configured to receive channel state indication information sent by the receiving device;
处理模块, 用于根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考 信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 其中, 所述预编码矩阵 W为两个矩阵 W1和 W2的乘积或直积,  a processing module, configured to determine, according to the channel state indication information, a precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from a codebook based on a reference signal, where the precoding matrix W is a product or a straight line of two matrices W1 and W2 Product,
其中, 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 The order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), is greater than or equal to the second codebook.
W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。 The rank of W2 Rank (W2).
在第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式中,第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank( W2 ) 为 1。  In a first possible implementation of the fourth aspect, the second rank W2 has a rank Rank (W2) of 1.
根据第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第二种可能的实 现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示的 指示符 ia和第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie; According to a fourth aspect or the second possible implementation of the fourth aspect, in a second possible implementation, the channel state indication information comprising: a first precoding matrix indicator indicator codebook W1 i a And an indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
所述处理模块具体用于:  The processing module is specifically configured to:
根据预设的规则或预设的预编码矩阵指示的指示符与码本阶数的映射关 系分别确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数;  Determining the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 w。 Determining the receiving according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 The device is based on the precoding matrix w selected from the codebook based on the reference signal.
根据第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第三种可能的实 现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的 指示符 ia、第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、信道质量信息指示符 CQI、 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 )和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; 所述处理模块具体用于: According to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a third possible implementation, the channel state indication information includes: an indicator indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook i a And an indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a channel quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1, and a total order of the precoding matrix W; The processing module is specifically configured to:
根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶 数确定所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  Determining the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 according to the order of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 w。  The precoding matrix w selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
根据第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第四种可能的实 现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的 指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 所述 CQI、 所述第二 码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; According to the fourth aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a fourth possible implementation, the channel state indication information includes: an indicator indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook i a An indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, the CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述处理模块具体用于:  The processing module is specifically configured to:
根据所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶 数确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 );  Determining the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 according to the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
根据第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第五种可能的实 现方式中,所述信道状态指示信息包括:所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值;  According to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a fifth possible implementation, the channel state indication information includes: an order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and a combined quantized value of the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述处理模块具体用于:  The processing module is specifically configured to:
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所 述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  Determining the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 according to the combined quantized value of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 And an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2);
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
根据第四方面的第五种可能的实现方式, 在第六种可能的实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息还包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; 所述处理模块具体用于: According to the fifth possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a sixth possible implementation, the channel state indication information further includes: a total order of the precoding matrix W; The processing module is specifically configured to:
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的组合的量化值和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述第一码 本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数。  Determining the number according to a combination of the quantized value of the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) and the total order of the precoding matrix W The order Rank of one codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2.
根据第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第七种可能的实 现方式中,所述信道状态指示信息包括:所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2); According to the fourth aspect or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a seventh possible implementation, the channel state indication information includes: an order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and The order of the second codebook W2 Rank (W2) ;
所述处理模块具体用于:  The processing module is specifically configured to:
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 w。  The precoding matrix w selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
根据第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第八种可能的实 现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述预编码矩阵 w的总阶数;  According to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in the eighth possible implementation manner, the channel state indication information includes: a total order of the precoding matrix w;
所述处理模块具体用于:  The processing module is specifically configured to:
根据所述预编码矩阵 w的总阶数和所述发送设备的天线配置信息确定所 述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。 其中, 所述发送设备的天线配置信息包括: 第一天线端口数、 第二天线端口 数和天线的极化类型;  Determining, according to a total order of the precoding matrix w and antenna configuration information of the transmitting device, an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2. . The antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
根据第四方面、 第四方面的第一种至第八种可能的实现方式中的任意一 种, 在第九种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一码本 W1和所述第二码本 W2分 别从长期演进 LTE系统的 2天线码本、 4天线码本或者 8天线码本中选取。  According to the fourth aspect, any one of the first to the eighth possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect, in the ninth possible implementation manner, the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 is selected from a 2-antenna codebook, a 4-antenna codebook, or an 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, respectively.
本发明实施例提供的确定预编码矩阵指示的方法、 接收设备和发送设 备, 第一码本 W1的阶数大于或等于第二码本的阶数能保证最终的预编码 矩阵 W 的阶数被很好的逼近和模拟。 因此, 发送设备基于接收设备反馈 的从本发明的码本结构中选择的预编码矩阵进行预编码, 可以有效地提高 预编码的精度, 从而减少性能损失, 提高系统的吞吐量。 附图说明  The method for determining the precoding matrix indication, the receiving device, and the sending device provided by the embodiment of the present invention, the order of the first codebook W1 being greater than or equal to the order of the second codebook can ensure that the order of the final precoding matrix W is Very good approximation and simulation. Therefore, the transmitting device performs precoding based on the precoding matrix selected from the codebook structure of the present invention fed back by the receiving device, which can effectively improve the accuracy of precoding, thereby reducing performance loss and improving system throughput. DRAWINGS
为了更清楚地说明本发明实施例或现有技术中的技术方案, 下面将对实 施例或现有技术描述中所需要使用的附图作一简单地介绍, 显而易见地, 下 面描述中的附图是本发明的一些实施例, 对于本领域普通技术人员来讲, 在 不付出创造性劳动性的前提下, 还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。 In order to more clearly illustrate the embodiments of the present invention or the technical solutions in the prior art, the following will be true. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The accompanying drawings, which are required to be used in the description of the prior art, are briefly described. It is obvious that the drawings in the following description are some embodiments of the present invention, and no one would be creative to those skilled in the art Other drawings can also be obtained from these drawings on the premise of labor.
图 1为一维线阵天线的结构示意图;  1 is a schematic structural view of a one-dimensional linear array antenna;
图 2为二维面阵天线的结构示意图;  2 is a schematic structural view of a two-dimensional array antenna;
图 3为本发明确定预编码矩阵指示的方法实施例一的流程图;  3 is a flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a method for determining a precoding matrix indication according to the present invention;
图 4为本发明确定预编码矩阵指示的方法实施例二的流程图;  4 is a flowchart of Embodiment 2 of a method for determining a precoding matrix indication according to the present invention;
图 5为本发明接收设备实施例一的结构示意图;  FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a receiving device according to the present invention;
图 6为本发明接收设备实施例二的结构示意图;  6 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a receiving device according to the present invention;
图 7为本发明发送设备实施例一的结构示意图;  7 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a transmitting device according to the present invention;
图 8为本发明接收设备实施例三的硬件结构示意图;  8 is a schematic structural diagram of hardware of Embodiment 3 of a receiving device according to the present invention;
图 9为本发明发送设备实施例二的硬件结构示意图;  9 is a schematic structural diagram of hardware of a second embodiment of a transmitting device according to the present invention;
图 10为本发明通信系统实施例的结构示意图。 具体实施方式 为使本发明实施例的目的、 技术方案和优点更加清楚, 下面将结合本发 明实施例中的附图, 对本发明实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、 完整地描述, 显然, 所描述的实施例是本发明一部分实施例, 而不是全部的实施例。 基于 本发明中的实施例, 本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获 得的所有其他实施例, 都属于本发明保护的范围。  FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a communication system according to the present invention. The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention are clearly and completely described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention. The embodiments are a part of the embodiments of the invention, and not all of the embodiments. All other embodiments obtained by a person of ordinary skill in the art based on the embodiments of the present invention without creative efforts are within the scope of the present invention.
本发明的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统, 例如: 全球移动通讯 (Global System of Mobile communication,简称: GSM)系统、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,简称: CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,简称: WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(General Packet Radio Service, 简称: GPRS)、 长期演进(Long Term Evolution, 简称: LTE) 系统、 先进的长期演进 (Advanced long term evolution, 简称: LTE-A) 系统、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System,简称: UMTS ) 等。  The technical solution of the present invention can be applied to various communication systems, such as: Global System of Mobile communication (GSM) system, Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) system, and wideband code division. Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) system, General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, Advanced Long Term Evolution (Advanced Long) Term evolution, abbreviated as: LTE-A) System, Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS), etc.
在本发明实施例中, 用户设备 (User Equipment, 简称: UE) 包括但不 限于移动台 (Mobile Station, 简称: MS)、 中继 (Relay), 移动终端 (Mobile Terminal )、移动电话( Mobile Telephone )、手机( Handset )及便携设备( Portable Equipment)等, 该用户设备可以经无线接入网(Radio Access Network,简称: RAN) 与一个或多个核心网进行通信, 例如, 用户设备可以是移动电话 (或 称为"蜂窝"电话)、具有无线通信功能的计算机等,用户设备还可以是便携式、 袖珍式、 手持式、 计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置。 In the embodiment of the present invention, the user equipment (User Equipment, UE for short) includes but is not limited to a mobile station (Mobile Station, MS for short), a relay (Relay), and a mobile terminal (Mobile). Terminal, mobile phone, mobile device (Handset) and portable device (Portable Equipment), etc., the user equipment can communicate with one or more core networks via a radio access network (Radio Access Network, RAN) For example, the user device may be a mobile phone (or "cellular" phone), a computer with wireless communication capabilities, etc., and the user device may also be a portable, pocket, handheld, computer built-in or in-vehicle mobile device.
在本发明实施例中, 基站可以是 GSM 或 CDMA 中的基站 (Base Transceiver Station, 简称: BTS ) , 也可以是 WCDMA中的基站 (NodeB, 简称: NB ),还可以是 LTE中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,简称: eNB 或 e-NodeB ) , 或者中继等, 本发明并不限定。  In the embodiment of the present invention, the base station may be a base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS for short) in GSM or CDMA, or a base station (NodeB, NB for short) in WCDMA, or an evolved base station in LTE. (Evolutional Node B, abbreviated as: eNB or e-NodeB), or relay, etc., the present invention is not limited.
多天线系统是指发送设备和接收设备通过多根天线进行通信的系统。 其 中, 当发送设备为基站, 则接收设备为 UE; 反之, 当发送设备为 UE, 则接 收设备为基站。 相对于单天线系统, 发送设备和接收设备的多个天线能够形 成空间的分集增益或者复用增益,能够有效的提高传输可靠性以及系统容量。 多天线系统中分集增益和复用增益一般可以通过发送设备的预编码方法和接 收设备的接收合并算法获得。  A multi-antenna system refers to a system in which a transmitting device and a receiving device communicate through a plurality of antennas. Wherein, when the sending device is a base station, the receiving device is a UE; otherwise, when the sending device is a UE, the receiving device is a base station. Compared with a single antenna system, multiple antennas of the transmitting device and the receiving device can form a spatial diversity gain or a multiplexing gain, which can effectively improve transmission reliability and system capacity. The diversity gain and multiplexing gain in a multi-antenna system can generally be obtained by a precoding method of the transmitting device and a receiving combining algorithm of the receiving device.
本发明实施例的多天线系统可以应用在单点传输场景, 即一个发送设备 与一个接收设备的传输场景。 也可以应用在多点联合传输的场景, 多点联合 传输是指多个发送设备对于同一个接收设备进行信号的联合传输, 例如, 发 送设备 A具有 2天线, 发送设备 B也具有 2天线, 两个发送设备同时对于接 收设备进行联合传输。 那么该接收设备接收的信号可以看成是一个 4天线基 站发送得到的信号。  The multi-antenna system of the embodiment of the present invention can be applied to a single-point transmission scenario, that is, a transmission scenario of a transmitting device and a receiving device. It can also be applied to the scenario of multi-point joint transmission. Multi-point joint transmission refers to the joint transmission of signals by multiple transmitting devices to the same receiving device. For example, transmitting device A has 2 antennas, and transmitting device B also has 2 antennas, two The transmitting devices simultaneously perform joint transmission on the receiving device. Then the signal received by the receiving device can be regarded as a signal transmitted by a 4-antenna base station.
图 3为本发明确定预编码矩阵指示的方法实施例一的流程图, 本实施例 的执行主体为接收设备,可以为基站或者 UE。当执行主体接收设备为基站时, 相应地, 发送设备可以为 UE, 当执行主体接收设备为 UE时, 相应地, 发送 设备可以为基站。 如图 3所示, 本实施例的方法可以包括:  FIG. 3 is a flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a method for determining a precoding matrix indication according to the present invention. The executor of this embodiment is a receiving device, which may be a base station or a UE. When the performing host receiving device is a base station, the sending device may be a UE. When the performing host receiving device is a UE, the sending device may be a base station. As shown in FIG. 3, the method in this embodiment may include:
步骤 301、 接收设备基于发送设备发送的参考信号, 从码本中选择预编 码矩阵 W, 其中, 所述预编码矩阵 W为第一码本 W1和第二码本 W2的直积 或乘积, 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 )大于或等于所述第二码本 W2 的阶数 Rank (W2)。  Step 301: The receiving device selects a precoding matrix W from the codebook according to the reference signal sent by the sending device, where the precoding matrix W is a direct product or a product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2. The order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
具体地, 所述第一码本 W1可以为代表水平向天线的码本, 所述第二码 本 W2可以为代表垂直向天线的码本。 Specifically, the first codebook W1 may be a codebook representing a horizontal antenna, and the second code This W2 can be a codebook representing a vertical antenna.
这是由于, 考虑到垂直向角度扩展一般在 2-4度左右, 而水平向角度 扩展在 8-15度左右, 因此意味着水平向可区分的径较多,从而多层传输的 特性更容易被支持, 因此, 选择第一码本 W1和第二码本 W2时, 代表水 平向的第一码本 W1可以选择为阶数较高的码本,代表垂直向的第二码本 W2 可以选择为阶数较低的码本。 具体地, 设需要构建的 3D码本, 即预编码矩 阵 W, 的阶数为 R, 第一码本 W1的阶数为 s, 第二码本 W2的阶数为 t, 则 限定 s≥t。 例如阶数为 6的 3D码本 W, W为 W1和 W2的乘积或直积, W1和 W2的选择方案可以为: Rank (W1 ) =3, Rank (W2) =2, 或者, 可 以为 Rank (W1 ) =6, Rank (W2) =1。  This is because, considering that the vertical angle expansion is generally around 2-4 degrees, and the horizontal angle is extended by about 8-15 degrees, it means that the horizontally distinguishable diameter is more, and the characteristics of the multilayer transmission are easier. Supported, therefore, when the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 are selected, the first codebook W1 representing the horizontal direction can be selected as the codebook with higher order, and the second codebook W2 representing the vertical direction can be selected. It is a codebook with a lower order. Specifically, it is assumed that the 3D codebook to be constructed, that is, the precoding matrix W, has an order of R, the order of the first codebook W1 is s, and the order of the second codebook W2 is t, and s≥t is defined. . For example, the 3D codebook of order 6 is W, W is the product or direct product of W1 and W2, and the selection scheme of W1 and W2 can be: Rank (W1) = 3, Rank (W2) = 2, or, can be Rank (W1) = 6, Rank (W2) =1.
进一步地, 所述第一码本 W1和所述第二码本 W2分别从长期演进 LTE 系统的 2天线码本、 4天线码本或者 8天线码本中选取。  Further, the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 are respectively selected from a 2-antenna codebook, a 4-antenna codebook or an 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system.
矩阵 W1可以为表示宽带的信道特性的矩阵, 矩阵 W2可以为表示子带 的信道特性的矩阵; 或者, 矩阵 W1可以为表示长期的信道特性的矩阵, 矩 阵 W2可以为表示短期的信道特性的矩阵。  The matrix W1 may be a matrix representing broadband channel characteristics, and the matrix W2 may be a matrix representing channel characteristics of subbands; or, the matrix W1 may be a matrix representing long-term channel characteristics, and the matrix W2 may be a matrix representing short-term channel characteristics. .
如基于 Rel-10双码本结构的直积形式的 6阶码本中,第一码本 W1可 以为 3阶的 Rel-10码本, 第二码本 W2可以为 2阶的 Rel-10码本。  For example, in the 6th order codebook based on the direct product form of the Rel-10 dual codebook structure, the first codebook W1 may be a 3rd order Rel-10 codebook, and the second codebook W2 may be a 2nd order Rel-10 codebook. this.
进一步地, 本实施例在具体实现时, 还可以将所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 限定为 1。 即任意阶数 (设为 R阶) 的 3D码本可以由垂直向 1 阶的第二码本 W2和水平向 R阶的第一码本 W1码本的直积生成。  Further, in this implementation, in the specific implementation, the order Rank (W1) of the second codebook W2 may also be limited to 1. That is, the 3D codebook of any order (set to R order) can be generated by a direct product of the second codebook W2 perpendicular to the 1st order and the first codebook W1 codebook of the horizontal R order.
步骤 302、 所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使 所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  Step 302: The receiving device sends channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information.
相应地, 所述发送设备可以根据所述道状态指示信息, 按照 3GPP 中规 定的 PMI与预编码矩阵的关系, 得到接收设备的天线阵列的预编码矩阵 W。  Correspondingly, the sending device may obtain the precoding matrix W of the antenna array of the receiving device according to the relationship between the PMI and the precoding matrix specified in the 3GPP according to the track state indication information.
需要说明的是, 本发明实施例对 301 中的参考信号的类型不作限定。 例 如, 可以是信道状态信息参考信号 (Channel State Information Reference Signal, CSI RS) 、 解调参考信号 (Demodulation RS, DM RS) 或小区特定 的参考信号(Cell-specific RS, CRS ), CSI还可以包括信道质量指示(Channel Quality Indicator/Index,简称 CQI) 。 还需要说明的是, UE可以通过接收基站 通知(例如无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control, RRC)信令或者下行控制 信息(Downlink Control Information, DCI) )或者基于小区标识 ID得到参考 信号的资源配置并在对应的资源或者子帧得到参考信号。 It should be noted that the type of the reference signal in 301 is not limited in the embodiment of the present invention. For example, it may be a Channel State Information Reference Signal (CSI RS), a Demodulation Reference Signal (Demodulation RS, DM RS), or a Cell-Specific RS (CRS). The CSI may also include Channel Quality Indicator/Index (CQI). It should also be noted that the UE may receive a base station notification (for example, Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling or downlink control. Downlink Control Information (DCI) or resource configuration of the reference signal based on the cell identifier ID and obtain a reference signal in the corresponding resource or subframe.
本实施例, 通过在步骤 301中, 接收设备基于发送设备发送的参考信 号从码本中选择预编码矩阵 W时, 所述 W通过采用第一码本 W1与第二 码本 W2的乘积或直积来构造,从而能够在码本中表现出三维波束矢量的特 征, 因此所构造的预编码矩阵 W可以作为 3维 (3D ) 码本; 并且通过限 定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 W2的 阶数 Rank (W2 ) , 使得所构造的 3D码本 W符合天线在垂直向扩展角度 小于水平向扩展角度的特性, 因此, 所构造的 3D码本的精度较高, 因此, 发送设备基于接收设备反馈的从本发明的码本结构中选择的预编码矩阵 进行预编码, 可以有效地提高预编码的精度, 从而减少性能损失, 提高系 统的吞吐量。  In this embodiment, when the receiving device selects the precoding matrix W from the codebook based on the reference signal sent by the transmitting device, the W passes the product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 or Constructed to be able to represent the characteristics of the three-dimensional beam vector in the codebook, so the constructed precoding matrix W can be used as a 3-dimensional (3D) codebook; and by defining the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 such that the constructed 3D codebook W conforms to the characteristic that the antenna is less than the horizontal expansion angle at the vertical expansion angle, and therefore, the constructed 3D The accuracy of the codebook is high. Therefore, the transmitting device performs precoding based on the precoding matrix selected from the codebook structure of the present invention fed back by the receiving device, which can effectively improve the accuracy of the precoding, thereby reducing performance loss and improving the system. Throughput.
上述实施例, 在具体实现时, 进一步具体地, 对于步骤 302, 接收设备 确定了 3D码本 W之后, 向发送设备反馈信道状态指示信息, 以使发送设 备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定出所述 3D码本 W的过程,可以通过以 下六种方式来实现。  In the foregoing embodiment, in a specific implementation, specifically, in step 302, after the receiving device determines the 3D codebook W, the receiving device feeds back the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the location according to the channel state indication information. The process of describing the 3D codebook W can be implemented in the following six ways.
在第一种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia和第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie; In a first implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
则步骤 302具体可以为: 所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状 态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据预设的规则或预设的预编码矩阵指示的 指示符与码本阶数的映射关系分别确定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二 码本 W2的阶数, 并根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶 数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  The step 302 may be specifically: the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device indicates the indicator and the codebook level according to a preset rule or a preset precoding matrix. The mapping relationship of the number determines the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, respectively, and according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 The number determines the precoding matrix W.
在这种实现方式中, 发送设备与接收设备需要事先约定预设规则, 或者 事先约定预编码矩阵指示的指示符与码本阶数的映射关系, 因此, 接收设备 在反馈信道状态指示信息时, 可以不直接反馈第一码本 W1 和第二码本 W2 的阶数, 而是只需要反馈第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia和第二 码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie即可, 发送设备在接收到 ^和 ie之后, 可以隐式地获得第一码本 W1和第二码本 W2的阶数, 从而不会增加接收设 备向发送设备发送的信道状态指示信息的比特数。 此处, 其中一种可能的映射关系可以如下: 预编码矩阵指示的指示符可 以为所有阶数的码本级联后的指示符 i, 例如, 阶数为 1的码本指示符为 0到 il-1 , 阶数为 2的码本指示符为 il-1到 il+i2-2, 其中, il为阶数 1的码本个 数, i2为阶数 2的码本个数, 依次类推得到所有阶数的码本级联后的码本编 号, 然后可以建立水平向码本指示符和对应阶数的映射关系, 如表 1所示, 以及垂直向码本指示符和对应阶数的映射关系, 如表 2所示。 In this implementation manner, the sending device and the receiving device need to agree on a preset rule in advance, or pre-agreed the mapping relationship between the indicator indicated by the precoding matrix and the codebook order. Therefore, when the receiving device feeds back the channel state indication information, The order of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 may not be directly fed back, but only the indicator i a of the precoding matrix indication of the first codebook W1 and the precoding matrix indication of the second codebook W2 may be fed back. The indicator i e may be, after the receiving device receives the ^ and i e , the order of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 may be implicitly obtained, so that the receiving device does not increase the transmission to the transmitting device. The number of bits of the channel status indication information. Here, one of the possible mapping relationships may be as follows: The indicator indicated by the precoding matrix may be the indicator i after all the codebooks concatenated, for example, the codebook indicator of order 1 is 0 to Il-1 , the codebook indicator of order 2 is il-1 to il+i2-2, where il is the number of codebooks of order 1, i2 is the number of codebooks of order 2, and so on. Obtaining the codebook number of the codebooks of all orders, and then establishing a mapping relationship between the horizontal codebook indicator and the corresponding order, as shown in Table 1, and the vertical codebook indicator and the corresponding order The mapping relationship is shown in Table 2.
Figure imgf000020_0001
在第二种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本对应 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 信道质量信息指示符 CQI、 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述预 编码矩阵 W的总阶数;
Figure imgf000020_0001
In a second implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, and a channel a quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
则步骤 302具体可以为:  Step 302 may specifically be:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总 阶数确定所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的 阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 具体地, Rank ( W2 ) =所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数 Rank ( W ) /Rank ( Wl )。 这种方式在具体实现时, 在所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态 指示信息之前, 可以包括: The receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines, according to the order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the total order of the precoding matrix W. The order of the second codebook W2 is Rank (W2), and the precoding matrix W is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2. Specifically, Rank (W2) = the total order of the precoding matrix W, Rank (W) / Rank (Wl). In this manner, before the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the method may include:
所述接收设备将所述第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia与所述 第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl )进行联合编码, 将所述第二码本 W2的预编 码矩阵指示的指示符 ie与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 The receiving device jointly encodes the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook with the order Rank (W1 ) of the first codebook W1, and the second codebook W2 The indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix is jointly encoded with the CQI.
在第三种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本对应 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 所述 CQI、 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总 阶数; In a third implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
则步骤 302具体可以为:  Step 302 may specifically be:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总 阶数确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的 阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  The receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines, according to the order Rank of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2) and the total order of the precoding matrix W. The order of the first codebook W1 is Rank (W1), and the precoding matrix W is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
这种方式在具体实现时, 在所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态 指示信息之前, 可以包括:  In a specific implementation, before the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the method may include:
所述接收设备将所述第二码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie与所述 第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 )进行联合编码, 将所述第一码本 W1的预编 码矩阵指示的指示符 ia与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 The receiving device jointly encodes the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the second codebook with the order Rank (W2 ) of the second codebook W2, and the first codebook W1 is The indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix is jointly encoded with the CQI.
在第四种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量 化值。  In a fourth implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: a combination of the order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the order of the second codebook, W2, Rank (W2) value.
例如, 可将第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的组合方式采用各种量化值来表示, 例如对于总阶数为 6的 3D 码本, 设第一种组合为: Rank (Wl ) =3, Rank (W2) =2, 将该第一种组量 化为 1 ; 设第二种组合为: Rank (Wl ) =6, Rank (W2) =1, 将该第二种组 量化为 2, 因此, 当采用第一种组合时, 所述信道状态指示信息为: 量化值 1 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数 6。 相应地, 发送设备在接收到该信道状态指 示信息时, 可以根据量化值 1确定出 Rank (Wl ) =3, Rank (W2) =2, 从而 确定出所述预编码矩阵\¥。 For example, a combination of the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2) may be represented by various quantized values, for example, for a total order of 6. 3D codebook, set the first combination as: Rank (Wl) = 3, Rank (W2) = 2, quantize the first group to 1; set the second combination as: Rank (Wl) = 6, Rank (W2) =1, the second group is quantized to 2, and therefore, when the first combination is employed, the channel state indication information is: a quantization value of 1 and a total order of 6 of the precoding matrix W. Correspondingly, when receiving the channel state indication information, the sending device may determine Rank (Wl) = 3, Rank (W2) = 2 according to the quantized value 1, thereby Determine the precoding matrix \¥.
在该方式中, 步骤 302具体可以为:  In this manner, step 302 may specifically be:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所 述第二码本 W2的阶数,并根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2 的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  The receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device is based on the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2, Rank The combined quantized value of (W2) determines the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2, and according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the The order of the second codebook W2 determines the precoding matrix W.
进一步地, 所述信道状态指示信息除了包括所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的组合的量化值之外, 还可以包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数。 以使所述发送设备进一步验证根 据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank(Wl )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank(W2) 的组合的量化值确定的所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码 本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的正确性。  Further, the channel state indication information may be in addition to the quantized value including the combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2. The method includes: a total order of the precoding matrix W. The first code determined by the transmitting device to further verify a combined quantized value according to a combination of the order Rank(W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank(W2) of the second codebook W2 The correctness of the order Rank of the W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2).
在第五种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。  In a fifth implementation manner, the channel state indication information includes: an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
在这种方式中, 接收设备不反馈所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数, 而直接反 馈第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (Wl ), 发 送设备在接收到该信道状态指示信息, 可以根据 Rank (Wl ) XRank (Wl ) 得到预编码矩阵 W的总阶数。  In this manner, the receiving device does not feed back the total order of the precoding matrix W, and directly feeds back the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (Wl) of the second codebook W2, The transmitting device receives the channel state indication information, and obtains the total order of the precoding matrix W according to Rank (Wl) XRank (Wl).
在该方式中, 步骤 302具体可以为:  In this manner, step 302 may specifically be:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码 矩阵 W。  The receiving device sends channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2. .
在第六种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 所述预编码矩 阵 W的总阶数。  In a sixth implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: a total order of the precoding matrix W.
步骤 302具体可以为:  Step 302 may specifically be:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数和所述发送设备的天线配置信息确定 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank(Wl )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank(W2), 并根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码 矩阵 w。 其中, 所述发送设备的天线配置信息包括: 第一天线端口数、 第二 天线端口数和天线的极化类型。 其中, 第一天线端口数是指发送设备的水平 向天线端口数, 第二天线端口数是指发送设备的垂直向天线端口数。 The receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the first codebook according to a total order of the precoding matrix W and antenna configuration information of the sending device. The order Rank of the W1, Rank (W1), and the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2), and determine the number according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2. Precoding Matrix w. The antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type. The number of the first antenna ports refers to the number of horizontal antenna ports of the transmitting device, and the number of the second antenna ports refers to the number of vertical antenna ports of the transmitting device.
本领域技术人员可以理解, 所述接收设备的天线配置信息可以在步骤 302之前或者与步骤 302 同时发送给所述发送设备, 这样, 发送设备可以根 据发送设备的水平向天线端口数和垂直向天线端口数确定出所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。 如当预编 码矩阵 W的总阶数为 4, 而水平向天线端口数为 4, 垂直向天线端口数为 2, 天线极化类型为交叉极化时, 因为 2天线端口的交叉极化天线的阶数通常为 1, 因此默认的第一码本 W1的阶数为 4, 而第二码本 W2的阶数为 1。 上述 六种接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根 据所述指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 w的方式中的任意一种,反馈第一码本 W1所需的比特数可以与 Rel-8、 Rel-9或 Rel-10中相同天线端口数的水平 向码本的反馈比特数相同, 也可以大于 Rel-8、 Rel-9或 Rel-10中相同天线 端口数的码本的反馈比特数, 此处不做限定。 反馈第二码本 W2所需的比 特数可以与 Rel-8、 Rel-9或 Rel-10中相同天线端口数的码本的反馈比特数 相同, 也可以大于 Rel-8、 Rel-9或 Rel-10中相同天线端口数的码本的反馈 比特数, 此处不做限定。  A person skilled in the art can understand that the antenna configuration information of the receiving device can be sent to the sending device before step 302 or simultaneously with step 302, so that the sending device can be based on the horizontal antenna port number and the vertical antenna of the transmitting device. The number of ports determines the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2. For example, when the total order of the precoding matrix W is 4, and the number of horizontal antenna ports is 4, the number of vertical antenna ports is 2, and the antenna polarization type is cross polarization, because of the cross antenna of the 2 antenna ports The order is usually 1, so the default first codebook W1 has an order of 4, and the second codebook W2 has an order of 1. The foregoing six receiving devices send channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines any one of the manners of the precoding matrix w according to the indication information, and feeds back the first codebook W1. The number of bits may be the same as the number of feedback bits of the horizontal codebook of the same number of antenna ports in Rel-8, Rel-9 or Rel-10, or may be larger than the same antenna port in Rel-8, Rel-9 or Rel-10 The number of feedback bits of the codebook is not limited here. The number of bits required to feed back the second codebook W2 may be the same as the number of feedback bits of the codebook of the same number of antenna ports in Rel-8, Rel-9 or Rel-10, or may be greater than Rel-8, Rel-9 or Rel The number of feedback bits of the codebook of the same number of antenna ports in the -10 is not limited herein.
但是可以看出, 上述的六种方式, 是在尽量不增加反馈比特数的情况 下, 实现接收设备向发送设备反馈构成 3D码本的第一码本 W1 的阶数和 第二码本 W2的阶数, 从而使发送设备得到第一码本 W1和第二码本 W2, 从而通过对第一码本 W1和第二码本 W2进行直积确定所述 3D码本 W。  However, it can be seen that, in the above six manners, the receiving device feeds back to the transmitting device the order of the first codebook W1 constituting the 3D codebook and the second codebook W2 without increasing the number of feedback bits. The order is such that the transmitting device obtains the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2, thereby determining the 3D codebook W by directly integrating the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2.
图 4为本发明确定预编码矩阵指示的方法实施例二的流程图, 本实施例 的执行主体为发送设备,可以为基站或者 UE。当执行主体发送设备为基站时, 相应地, 接收设备可以为 UE, 当执行主体发送设备为 UE时, 相应地, 接收 设备可以为基站。 如图 4所示, 本实施例的方法可以包括:  FIG. 4 is a flowchart of Embodiment 2 of a method for determining a precoding matrix indication according to the present invention. The executor of this embodiment is a transmitting device, which may be a base station or a UE. When the sending device is a base station, the receiving device may be a UE. When the sending device is a UE, the receiving device may be a base station. As shown in FIG. 4, the method in this embodiment may include:
步骤 401、 发送设备向接收设备发送参考信号。  Step 401: The sending device sends a reference signal to the receiving device.
其中, 参考信号的类型可以是信道状态信息参考信号 (Channel State Information Reference Signal, CSI RS) 、 解调参考信号 (Demodulation RS, DM RS ) 或小区特定的参考信号 (Cell-specific RS, CRS ) , CSI还可以包括 信道质量指示(Channel Quality Indicator/Index,简称 CQI)。还需要说明的是, UE可以通过接收基站通知(例如无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control, RRC) 信令或者下行控制信息 (Downlink Control Information, DCI) ) 或者基于小 区标识 ID得到参考信号的资源配置并在对应的资源或者子帧得到参考信号, 本发明实施例对此不作限定。 The type of the reference signal may be a Channel State Information Reference Signal (CSI RS), a Demodulation Reference Signal (Demodulation RS, DM RS ), or a Cell-Specific Reference Signal (CRS). CSI can also include Channel Quality Indicator/Index (CQI). It should be noted that the UE may obtain the resource configuration of the reference signal by receiving a base station notification, such as Radio Resource Control (RRC) signaling or Downlink Control Information (DCI) or based on the cell identifier ID. The reference signal is obtained in the corresponding resource or the subframe, which is not limited by the embodiment of the present invention.
步骤 402、 所述发送设备接收所述接收设备发送的信道状态指示信息。 步骤 403、 所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备 基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W,其中,所述预编码矩阵 W为两 个矩阵 W1和 W2的乘积或直积,其中,所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。  Step 402: The sending device receives channel state indication information sent by the receiving device. Step 403: The sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, a precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from a codebook based on a reference signal, where the precoding matrix W is a product of two matrices W1 and W2. Or direct product, wherein the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
具体地, 所述第一码本 W1可以为表征水平向天线的码本, 所述第二码 本 W2可以为表征垂直向天线的码本。  Specifically, the first codebook W1 may be a codebook that represents a horizontal antenna, and the second codebook W2 may be a codebook that represents a vertical antenna.
这是由于, 考虑到垂直向角度扩展一般在 2-4度左右, 而水平向角度 扩展在 8-15度左右, 因此意味着水平向可区分的径较多,从而多层传输的 特性更容易被支持, 因此, 选择第一码本 W1和第二码本 W2时, 代表水 平向的第一码本 W1可以选择为阶数较高的码本,代表垂直向的第二码本 W2 可以选择为阶数较低的码本。 具体地, 设需要构建的 3D码本, 即预编码矩 阵 W的阶数为 R, 第一码本 W1的阶数为 s, 第二码本 W2的阶数为 t, 则限 定 s≥t。 例如阶数为 6的 3D码本 W, W为 W1和 W2的直积, W1和 W2 的选择方案可以为: Rank (W1 ) =3, Rank (W2) =2, 或者, 可以为 Rank (Wl ) =6, Rank (W2 ) =1。  This is because, considering that the vertical angle expansion is generally around 2-4 degrees, and the horizontal angle is extended by about 8-15 degrees, it means that the horizontally distinguishable diameter is more, and the characteristics of the multilayer transmission are easier. Supported, therefore, when the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 are selected, the first codebook W1 representing the horizontal direction can be selected as the codebook with higher order, and the second codebook W2 representing the vertical direction can be selected. It is a codebook with a lower order. Specifically, it is assumed that the 3D codebook to be constructed, that is, the order of the precoding matrix W is R, the order of the first codebook W1 is s, and the order of the second codebook W2 is t, then s≥t is defined. For example, the 3D codebook of order 6 is W, W is the direct product of W1 and W2, and the selection scheme of W1 and W2 can be: Rank (W1) = 3, Rank (W2) = 2, or, can be Rank (Wl ) =6, Rank (W2) =1.
进一步地, 所述第一码本 Wl和所述第二码本 W2分别从长期演进 LTE 系统的 2天线码本、 4天线码本或者 8天线码本中选取。  Further, the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 are respectively selected from a 2-antenna codebook, a 4-antenna codebook or an 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system.
矩阵 W1可以为表示宽带的信道特性的矩阵, 矩阵 W2可以为表示子带 的信道特性的矩阵; 或者, 矩阵 W1可以为表示长期的信道特性的矩阵, 矩 阵 W2可以为表示短期的信道特性的矩阵。  The matrix W1 may be a matrix representing broadband channel characteristics, and the matrix W2 may be a matrix representing channel characteristics of subbands; or, the matrix W1 may be a matrix representing long-term channel characteristics, and the matrix W2 may be a matrix representing short-term channel characteristics. .
如基于 Rel-10双码本结构的直积形式的 6阶码本中,第一码本 W1可 以为 3阶的 Rel-10码本, 第二码本 W2可以为 2阶的 Rel-10码本。  For example, in the 6th order codebook based on the direct product form of the Rel-10 dual codebook structure, the first codebook W1 may be a 3rd order Rel-10 codebook, and the second codebook W2 may be a 2nd order Rel-10 codebook. this.
进一步地, 本实施例在具体实现时, 还可以将所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 限定为 1。 即任意阶数 (设为 R阶) 的 3D码本可以由垂直向为 1阶的第二码本 W2和水平向为 R阶的第一码本 W1码本的直积生成。 Further, in this implementation, in the specific implementation, the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 may be limited to 1. That is, the 3D codebook of any order (set to R order) can be vertically oriented The second codebook W2 of the 1st order and the direct product of the first codebook W1 codebook whose horizontal direction is the Rth order are generated.
步骤 403中, 具体地, 所述发送设备可以根据所述道状态指示信息, 按 照 3GPP中规定的 PMI与预编码矩阵的关系, 得到接收设备的天线阵列的预 编码矩阵\¥。  In step 403, specifically, the sending device may obtain a precoding matrix \¥ of the antenna array of the receiving device according to the relationship between the PMI and the precoding matrix specified in the 3GPP according to the track state indication information.
本实施例, 通过在步骤 403中, 根据所接收的信道状态指示信息确定 所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 由于发送设备 所选择的的预编码矩阵 w为代表水平向的第一码本 W1 与代表垂直向的 码本第二码本 W2的直积或乘积,从而能够在码本中表现出三维波束矢量的 特征, 因此该预编码矩阵 W可以作为 3D码本, 并且通过限定所述第一码 本 W1的阶数 Rank(Wl )大于或等于所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank(W2 ), 使得所述 3D码本 W符合天线在垂直向扩展角度小于水平向扩展角度的特 性, 因此, 所述 3D码本的精度较高, 因此, 发送设备基于接收设备反馈 的从本发明的码本结构中选择的预编码矩阵进行预编码, 可以有效地提高 预编码的精度, 从而减少性能损失, 提高系统的吞吐量。  In this embodiment, in step 403, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the received channel state indication information, and the precoding matrix w selected by the transmitting device is represented by a direct product or a product of the horizontal first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 representing the vertical direction, so that the characteristics of the three-dimensional beam vector can be expressed in the codebook, and thus the precoding matrix W can be used as a 3D code And, by defining the order Rank(W1) of the first codebook W1 to be greater than or equal to the order Rank(W2) of the second codebook W2, so that the 3D codebook W conforms to the antenna in the vertical direction. The angle is smaller than the horizontal expansion angle. Therefore, the accuracy of the 3D codebook is high. Therefore, the transmitting device performs precoding based on the precoding matrix selected from the codebook structure of the present invention fed back by the receiving device, which can effectively Improve the accuracy of precoding, thereby reducing performance loss and increasing system throughput.
上述实施例, 在具体实现时, 进一步具体地, 对于步骤 402, 所述发送 设备接收所述接收设备发送的信道状态指示信息, 以及步骤 403、 所述发送 设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选 择的预编码矩阵 W, 可以通过以下六种方式来实现。  In the above embodiment, in a specific implementation, further specifically, in step 402, the sending device receives channel state indication information sent by the receiving device, and step 403, the sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, The precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal can be implemented in the following six manners.
在第一种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia和第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie; 则步骤 403中所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设 备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括: In a first implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ; The determining, by the sending device, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, according to the channel state indication information, includes:
步骤一、 所述发送设备根据预设的规则或预设的预编码矩阵指示的指示 符与码本阶数的映射关系分别确定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数;  Step 1: The sending device determines the order of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order. The order of W2;
步骤二、所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2 的阶数确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Step 2: The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
在这种实现方式中, 发送设备与接收设备需要事先约定预设规则, 或者 事先约定预编码矩阵指示的指示符与码本阶数的映射关系, 因此, 接收设备 在反馈信道状态指示信息时, 可以不直接反馈第一码本 W1 和第二码本 W2 的阶数, 而是只需要反馈第一码本 Wl 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia和第二 码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie即可, 发送设备在接收到 ^和 ie之后, 可以隐式地获得第一码本 W1和第二码本 W2的阶数, 从而不会增加接收设 备向发送设备发送的信道状态指示信息的比特数。 In this implementation manner, the sending device and the receiving device need to agree on a preset rule in advance, or pre-agreed the mapping relationship between the indicator indicated by the precoding matrix and the codebook order. Therefore, when the receiving device feeds back the channel state indication information, Can not directly feedback the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 The order, but only the indicator i a of the precoding matrix indication of the first codebook W1 and the indicator i e of the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 need to be fed back, and the transmitting device receives the ^ and After i e , the order of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 may be implicitly obtained, so that the number of bits of the channel state indication information transmitted by the receiving device to the transmitting device is not increased.
此处, 其中一种可能的映射关系可以如下: 预编码矩阵指示的指示符可 以为所有阶数的码本级联后的指示符 i, 例如, 阶数为 1的码本指示符为 0到 il-l, 阶数为 2的码本指示符为 il-1到 il+i2-2, 其中, il为层 1的码本个数, i2为层 2的码本个数, 依次类推得到所有阶数的码本级联后的码本编号, 然 后可以建立水平向码本指示符和对应阶数的映射关系, 如上述的表 1所示, 以及垂直向码本指示符和对应阶数的映射关系, 如上述的表 2所示。  Here, one of the possible mapping relationships may be as follows: The indicator indicated by the precoding matrix may be the indicator i after all the codebooks concatenated, for example, the codebook indicator of order 1 is 0 to Il-l, the codebook indicator of order 2 is il-1 to il+i2-2, where il is the number of codebooks of layer 1, and i2 is the number of codebooks of layer 2, and so on. The codebook number of the codebook of the order is cascaded, and then the mapping relationship between the horizontal codebook indicator and the corresponding order can be established, as shown in Table 1 above, and the vertical codebook indicator and the corresponding order The mapping relationship is as shown in Table 2 above.
在第二种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本对应 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 信道质量信息指示符 CQI、 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述预 编码矩阵 W的总阶数。 In a second implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, and a channel a quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and a total order of the precoding matrix W.
则步骤 403中所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设 备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括:  Then, the sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, and includes:
步骤一、 所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所 述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 );  Step 1: The sending device determines the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 according to the order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
步骤二、所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2 的阶数确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Step 2: The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
并且, 这种方式在具体实现时, 在所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信 道状态指示信息之前, 可以包括:  And, in a specific implementation, before the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the method may include:
所述接收设备将所述第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia与所述 第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl )进行联合编码, 将所述第二码本 W2的预编 码矩阵指示的指示符 ie与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 The receiving device jointly encodes the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook with the order Rank (W1 ) of the first codebook W1, and the second codebook W2 The indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix is jointly encoded with the CQI.
在第三种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本对应 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 所述 CQI、 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总 阶数。 In a third implementation, the channel state indication information may include: a first code indicating a precoding matrix corresponding to the indicator of the present i a, i e the second indicator code indicating the precoding matrix W2 is present, the The CQI, the order Rank of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2), and the total order of the precoding matrix W.
则步骤 403中所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设 备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 w, 包括: Then, the sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the receiving device in step 403. The precoding matrix w selected from the codebook based on the reference signal includes:
步骤一、 所述发送设备根据所述第二码本 W2 的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所 述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 );  Step 1: The transmitting device determines the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 according to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
步骤二、所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2 的阶数确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Step 2: The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
并且, 这种方式在具体实现时, 在所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信 道状态指示信息之前, 可以包括:  And, in a specific implementation, before the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the method may include:
所述接收设备将所述第二码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie与所述 第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 )进行联合编码, 将所述第一码本 W1的预编 码矩阵指示的指示符 ia与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 The receiving device jointly encodes the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the second codebook with the order Rank (W2 ) of the second codebook W2, and the first codebook W1 is The indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix is jointly encoded with the CQI.
在第四种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量 化值。  In a fourth implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: a combination of the combination of the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) value.
例如, 可将第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的组合方式采用各种量化值来表示, 例如对于总阶数为 6的 3D 码本, 设第一种组合为: Rank (W1 ) =3, Rank (W2) =2, 将该第一种组量 化为 1 ; 设第二种组合为: Rank (W1 ) =6, Rank (W2) =1, 将该第二种组 量化为 2, 因此, 当采用第一种组合时, 所述信道状态指示信息为: 量化值 1 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数 6。 相应地, 发送设备在接收到该信道状态指 示信息时, 可以根据量化值 1确定出 Rank (W1 ) =3, Rank (W2) =2, 从而 确定出所述预编码矩阵\¥。  For example, the combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 may be represented by various quantized values, for example, for a total order of 6. 3D codebook, set the first combination as: Rank (W1) = 3, Rank (W2) = 2, quantize the first group to 1; set the second combination to be: Rank (W1) = 6, Rank (W2) =1, the second group is quantized to 2, and therefore, when the first combination is employed, the channel state indication information is: a quantization value of 1 and a total order of 6 of the precoding matrix W. Correspondingly, when receiving the channel state indication information, the transmitting device may determine Rank (W1) = 3 and Rank (W2) = 2 according to the quantized value 1, thereby determining the precoding matrix \¥.
在这种方式中, 步骤 403中所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确 定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括:  In this manner, the sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, according to the channel state indication information, including:
步骤一、 所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所 述第二码本 W2 的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  Step 1: The sending device determines the first codebook W1 according to the combined quantized value of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2. The order Rank (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 Rank (W2);
步骤二、所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2 的阶数确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Step 2: The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
进一步地, 所述信道状态指示信息除了包括所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的组合的量化值之外, 还可以包括: 所述预编码矩阵 w的总阶数。 以使所述发送设备进一步验证根 据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank(Wl )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank(W2) 的组合的量化值确定的所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码 本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的正确性。 Further, the channel state indication information is not only the quantized value including the combination of the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2), It may also include: a total order of the precoding matrix w. The first code determined by the transmitting device to further verify a combined quantized value according to a combination of the order Rank(W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank(W2) of the second codebook W2 The correctness of the order Rank of the W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2).
在第五种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。  In a fifth implementation manner, the channel state indication information includes: an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
在这种方式中, 接收设备不反馈所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数, 而直接反 馈第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2), 发 送设备在接收到该信道状态指示信息, 可以根据 Rank (Wl ) XRank (W2) 得到预编码矩阵 W的总阶数。  In this manner, the receiving device does not feed back the total order of the precoding matrix W, but directly feeds back the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, The transmitting device receives the channel state indication information, and obtains the total order of the precoding matrix W according to Rank (Wl) XRank (W2).
则步骤 403中, 所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括:  In step 403, the sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, including:
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
在第六种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 所述预编码矩 阵 W的总阶数。  In a sixth implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: a total order of the precoding matrix W.
则步骤 403中, 所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括:  In step 403, the sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, including:
步骤一、所述发送设备根据所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数和所述发送设备 的天线配置信息确定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。 其中, 所述发送设备的天线配置信息包括: 第一天 线端口数、 第二天线端口数和天线的极化类型;  Step 1: The sending device determines, according to the total order of the precoding matrix W and the antenna configuration information of the sending device, the order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2. The order of Rank (W2). The antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: a first day line port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type;
步骤二、所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2 的阶数确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Step 2: The transmitting device determines, according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal.
本领域技术人员可以理解,发送设备可以根据发送设备的水平向天线端 口数和垂直向天线端口数确定出所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所 述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。  A person skilled in the art may understand that the sending device may determine the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (Wl) and the second codebook W2 according to the horizontal number of the transmitting device and the number of the vertical antenna ports. Order Rank (W2).
上述六种发送设备接收所述接收设备发送的信道状态指示信息, 所述发 送设备根据所述指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W的方式中的任意一种,反馈 第一码本 W1所需的比特数可以与 Rel-8、 Rel-9或 Rel-10中相同天线端口 数的码本的反馈比特数相同, 也可以大于 Rel-8、 Rel-9或 Rel-10中相同天 线端口数的码本的反馈比特数, 此处不做限定。 反馈第二码本 W2所需的 比特数反馈第一码本 W1所需的比特数可以与 Rel-8、Rel-9或 Rel-10中相同 天线端口数的码本的反馈比特数相同, 也可以大于 Rel-8、 Rel-9或 Rel-10 中相同天线端口数的码本的反馈比特数, 此处不做限定。 The foregoing six types of sending devices receive the channel state indication information sent by the receiving device, and the sending device determines any one of the manners of the precoding matrix W according to the indication information, and feeds back the first codebook W1. The number of bits can be the same as the antenna port in Rel-8, Rel-9 or Rel-10 The number of feedback bits of the codebook of the same number is the same, and may be greater than the number of feedback bits of the codebook of the same number of antenna ports in Rel-8, Rel-9, or Rel-10, which is not limited herein. The number of bits required to feed back the second codebook W2 to feed back the first codebook W1 may be the same as the number of feedback bits of the codebook of the same number of antenna ports in Rel-8, Rel-9 or Rel-10, The number of feedback bits of the codebook that can be greater than the number of the same antenna port in Rel-8, Rel-9, or Rel-10 is not limited herein.
但是可以看出, 上述的六种方式, 是在尽量不增加反馈比特数的情况 下, 实现接收设备向发送设备反馈构成 3D码本的第一码本 W1 的阶数和 第二码本 W2的阶数, 从而发送设备得到第一码本 W1和第二码本 W2 , 发送设备从而通过对第一码本 W1 和第二码本 W2进行直积确定所述 3D 码本 w。  However, it can be seen that, in the above six manners, the receiving device feeds back to the transmitting device the order of the first codebook W1 constituting the 3D codebook and the second codebook W2 without increasing the number of feedback bits. The order, whereby the transmitting device obtains the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2, and the transmitting device determines the 3D codebook w by directly integrating the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2.
图 5为本发明接收设备实施例一的结构示意图, 本实施例的接收设备可 以为基站或者终端。 如图 5所示, 本实施例的接收设备 500可以包括: 接收 模块 11和发送模块 12, 其中,  FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a receiving device according to the present invention. The receiving device in this embodiment may be a base station or a terminal. As shown in FIG. 5, the receiving device 500 of this embodiment may include: a receiving module 11 and a sending module 12, where
接收模块 11, 可以用于基于发送设备发送的参考信号, 从码本中选择预 编码矩阵 W, 其中, 所述预编码矩阵 W为第一码本 W1和第二码本 W2的乘 积或直积,  The receiving module 11 may be configured to select a precoding matrix W from the codebook based on a reference signal sent by the sending device, where the precoding matrix W is a product or a direct product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2. ,
其中, 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  The order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), is greater than or equal to the order of the second codebook W2 (W2);
发送模块 12, 可以用于向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所 述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  The sending module 12 may be configured to send channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information.
进一步地, 第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 为 1。  Further, the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2), is 1.
本实施例的接收设备, 可以用于执行图 3所示方法实施例的技术方案, 其实现原理类似, 此处不再赘述。  The receiving device of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and the implementation principle thereof is similar, and details are not described herein again.
本实施例的接收设备, 基于发送设备发送的参考信号从码本中选择预 编码矩阵 W时, 通过采用代表水平向的第一码本 W1 与代表垂直向的码 本第二码本 W2的直积来构造,从而能够在码本中表现出三维波束矢量的特 征, 因此所构造的预编码矩阵 W可以作为 3维 (3D ) 码本; 并且通过限 定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 W2的 阶数 Rank (W2 ) , 使得所构造的 3D码本 W符合 3D信道在垂直向扩展 角度小于水平向扩展角度的特性, 因此, 所构造的 3D码本的精度较高, 因此, 发送设备基于接收设备反馈的从本发明的码本结构中选择的预编码 矩阵进行预编码, 可以有效地提高预编码的精度, 从而减少性能损失, 提 高系统的吞吐量。 The receiving device of this embodiment selects the precoding matrix W from the codebook based on the reference signal transmitted by the transmitting device, by using the first codebook W1 representing the horizontal direction and the second codebook W2 representing the vertical codebook. Constructed to be able to represent the characteristics of the three-dimensional beam vector in the codebook, so the constructed precoding matrix W can be used as a 3-dimensional (3D) codebook; and by defining the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, such that the constructed 3D codebook W conforms to the characteristic that the 3D channel is smaller than the horizontal expansion angle at the vertical expansion angle, and thus, the constructed The accuracy of the 3D codebook is high. Therefore, the transmitting device performs precoding based on the precoding matrix selected from the codebook structure of the present invention fed back by the receiving device, which can effectively improve the precision of the precoding, thereby reducing performance loss and improving the throughput of the system.
进一步地, 本实施例还可以有以下六种具体的实现方式。  Further, this embodiment may also have the following six specific implementation manners.
在第一种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia和第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie; 所述发送模块 12具体可以用于: In a first implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ; The sending module 12 can be specifically used to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据预 设的规则或预设的预编码矩阵指示的指示符与码本阶数的映射关系分别确定 所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数, 并根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  Transmitting the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the first code according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order The order of the W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 are determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
在第二种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本对应 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 信道质量信息指示符 CQI、 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述预 编码矩阵 W的总阶数; In a second implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, and a channel a quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送模块 12具体可以用于:  The sending module 12 can be specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述 第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的阶数和所述第 二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  Transmitting the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the second according to the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the total order of the precoding matrix W. The order of the codebook W2 is Rank (W2), and the precoding matrix W is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
图 6 为本发明接收设备实施例二的结构示意图, 本实施例的接收设备 600, 在图 5所示接收设备的基础上, 针对第二种具体实现方式, 进一步地还 包括: 编码模块 13,  FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a receiving device according to the present invention. The receiving device 600 of the present embodiment, based on the receiving device shown in FIG. 5, further includes: an encoding module 13 for the second specific implementation manner.
该编码模块 13, 可以用于在所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态 指示信息之前, 将所述第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ^与所述第 一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl )进行联合编码, 将所述第二码本 W2的预编码 矩阵指示的指示符 ie与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 The encoding module 13 may be configured to: before the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the indicator indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook and the first codebook W1 The order Rank (W1) is jointly coded, and the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 is jointly encoded with the CQI.
在第三种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本对应 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 所述 CQI、 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总 阶数; In a third implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total of the precoding matrix W Order;
所述发送模块 12具体可以用于:  The sending module 12 can be specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述 第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的阶数和所述第 二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  Transmitting the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the first according to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W The order of the codebook W1 is Rank (W1), and the precoding matrix W is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
进一步地, 该第三种实现方式也可以采用图 6所示的接收设备的结构, 即, 还包括: 编码模块 13,  Further, the third implementation manner may also adopt the structure of the receiving device shown in FIG. 6, that is, the method further includes: an encoding module 13,
此处, 该编码模块 13, 用于在所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状 态指示信息之前, 将所述第二码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie与所述 第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 )进行联合编码, 将所述第一码本 W1的预编 码矩阵指示的指示符 ia与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 Here, the encoding module 13 is configured to: after the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the second codebook and the second The order Rank (W2) of the codebook W2 is jointly encoded, and the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 is jointly encoded with the CQI.
在第四种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量 化值;  In a fourth implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: a combination of the order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the order of the second codebook, W2, Rank (W2) Value
所述发送模块 12具体可以用于:  The sending module 12 can be specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数,并根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定 所述预编码矩阵 W。  Transmitting the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device is based on the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (Wl) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) The combined quantized value determines the order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the order of the second codebook W2, and according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook The order of W2 determines the precoding matrix W.
进一步地, 所述信道状态指示信息除了包括所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的组合的量化值之外, 还可以包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数。 以使所述发送设备进一步验证根 据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank( W1 )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank( W2) 的组合的量化值确定的所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码 本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的正确性。  Further, the channel state indication information may be in addition to the quantized value including the combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2. The method includes: a total order of the precoding matrix W. The first code determined by the transmitting device to further verify a combined quantized value according to the combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 The correctness of the order Rank of the W1 (Wl) and the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2).
在第五种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  In a fifth implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述发送模块 12具体可以用于: 向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所述第 一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 The sending module 12 can be specifically configured to: And transmitting the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
在第六种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 所述预编码矩 阵 W的总阶数;  In a sixth implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送模块 12具体可以用于:  The sending module 12 can be specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数和所述发送设备的天线配置信息确定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2), 并根据所 述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W, 其中, 所述发送设备的天线配置信息包括: 第一天线端口数、 第二天线端口 数和天线的极化类型。  Sending the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the order of the first codebook W1 according to the total order of the precoding matrix W and the antenna configuration information of the sending device. Rank (W1) and the order Rank of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2), and determining the precoding matrix W according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 The antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type.
进一步地,上述各种实现方式中,所述第一码本 W1和所述第二码本 W2 分别可以从长期演进 LTE系统的 2天线码本、 4天线码本或者 8天线码本中 选取。  Further, in the foregoing various implementation manners, the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 may be selected from a 2-antenna codebook, a 4-antenna codebook, or an 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, respectively.
图 7为本发明发送设备实施例一的结构示意图, 本实施例的发送设备可 以为基站或者终端。 如图 7所示, 本实施例的发送设备 700可以包括: 发送 模块 21、 接收模块 22和处理模块 23, 其中,  FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a transmitting device according to the present invention. The transmitting device in this embodiment may be a base station or a terminal. As shown in FIG. 7, the transmitting device 700 of this embodiment may include: a sending module 21, a receiving module 22, and a processing module 23, where
发送模块 21, 可以用于向接收设备发送参考信号;  The sending module 21 can be configured to send a reference signal to the receiving device.
接收模块 22, 可以用于接收所述接收设备发送的信道状态指示信息; 处理模块 23, 可以用于根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基 于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W,其中,所述预编码矩阵 W为两个 矩阵 W1和 W2的乘积或直积,  The receiving module 22 may be configured to receive the channel state indication information sent by the receiving device, where the processing module 23 may be configured to determine, according to the channel state indication information, a precoding matrix selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal. W, wherein the precoding matrix W is a product or a direct product of two matrices W1 and W2,
其中, 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。  The order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
进一步地, 第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 为 1。  Further, the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2), is 1.
本实施例的发送设备, 可以用于执行图 4所示方法实施例的技术方案, 其实现原理类似, 此处不再赘述。  The sending device of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and the implementation principle is similar, and details are not described herein again.
本实施例的发送设备, 根据所接收的信道状态指示信息确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 由于发送设备所选择的 的预编码矩阵 W为代表水平向的第一码本 W1 与代表垂直向的码本第二 码本 W2的乘积或直积, 从而能够在码本中表现出三维波束矢量的特征, 因 此该预编码矩阵 W可以作为 3D码本; 并且通过限定所述第一码本 W1的 阶数 Rank (W1 ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) , 使 得所述 3D码本 W符合 3D信道在垂直向扩展角度小于水平向扩展角度的 特性, 因此, 所述 3D码本的精度较高, 因此, 发送设备基于接收设备反 馈的从本发明的码本结构中选择的预编码矩阵进行预编码, 可以有效地提 高预编码的精度, 从而减少性能损失, 提高系统的吞吐量。 The transmitting device of this embodiment determines, according to the received channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, because the precoding matrix W selected by the transmitting device is representative of the horizontal direction. The first codebook W1 and the codebook representing the vertical direction are second The product or direct product of the codebook W2, so that the characteristics of the three-dimensional beam vector can be expressed in the codebook, so the precoding matrix W can be used as a 3D codebook; and by defining the order Rank of the first codebook W1 ( W1) is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, such that the 3D codebook W conforms to the characteristic that the 3D channel is smaller than the horizontal expansion angle at the vertical expansion angle, and therefore, the 3D codebook The accuracy is high. Therefore, the transmitting device performs precoding based on the precoding matrix selected from the codebook structure of the present invention fed back by the receiving device, which can effectively improve the accuracy of precoding, thereby reducing performance loss and improving system throughput. .
进一步地, 上述实施例还可以有以下六种具体的实现方式。  Further, the foregoing embodiment may also have the following six specific implementation manners.
在第一种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本 W1 的预 编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia和第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie; 所述处理模块 23具体可以用于: In a first implementation manner, the channel state indication information includes: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ; The processing module 23 can be specifically used to:
根据预设的规则或预设的预编码矩阵指示的指示符与码本阶数的映射关 系分别确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数;  Determining the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
在第二种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预 编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、信道 质量信息指示符 CQI、 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述预编码 矩阵 W的总阶数; In a second implementation manner, the channel state indication information includes: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, and a channel quality An information indicator CQI, an order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述处理模块 23具体可以用于:  The processing module 23 can be specifically configured to:
根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶 数确定所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  Determining the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 according to the order of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
在第三种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本对应 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 所述 CQI、 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总 阶数; In a third implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述处理模块 23具体可以用于:  The processing module 23 can be specifically configured to:
根据所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶 数确定所述第一码本 Wl的阶数 Rank (Wl ); According to the order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2) and the total order of the precoding matrix W Number determining the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (Wl);
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
在第四种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)的组合的量化值; 所述处理模块 23具体可以用于:  In a fourth implementation manner, the channel state indication information includes: a combined quantized value of the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) The processing module 23 can be specifically configured to:
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 Wl的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所 述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  Determining the order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 according to the combined quantized value of the order Rank of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) And an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2);
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 w。  The precoding matrix w selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
进一步地, 所述信道状态指示信息除了包括所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的组合的量化值之外, 还可以包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数。 以使所述发送设备进一步验证根 据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank( W1 )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank( W2) 的组合的量化值确定的所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码 本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的正确性。  Further, the channel state indication information may be in addition to the quantized value including the combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2. The method includes: a total order of the precoding matrix W. The first code determined by the transmitting device to further verify a combined quantized value according to the combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 The correctness of the order Rank of the W1 (Wl) and the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2).
在第五种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  In a fifth implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述处理模块 23具体可以用于:  The processing module 23 can be specifically configured to:
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
在第六种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 所述预编码矩 阵 W的总阶数;  In a sixth implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述处理模块 23具体可以用于:  The processing module 23 can be specifically configured to:
根据所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数和所述发送设备的天线配置信息确定所 述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。 其中, 所述发送设备的天线配置信息包括: 第一天线端口数、 第二天线端口 数和天线的极化类型;  Determining, according to a total order of the precoding matrix W and antenna configuration information of the transmitting device, an order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2. . The antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 w。 Determining the receiving according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 The device is based on the precoding matrix w selected from the codebook based on the reference signal.
进一步地,上述各种实现方式中,所述第一码本 W1和所述第二码本 W2 分别从长期演进 LTE系统的 2天线码本、 4天线码本或者 8天线码本中选取。  Further, in the above various implementation manners, the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 are respectively selected from a 2-antenna codebook, a 4-antenna codebook or an 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system.
图 8为本发明接收设备实施例三的硬件结构示意图, 本实施例的接收设 备可以为基站或者终端。 如图 8所示, 本实施例的接收设备 800可以包括: 接收器 801和发送器 802, 可选地, 该接收设备还可以包括处理器 803、 存 储器 804。 其中, 接收器 801、 发送器 802、 处理器 803和存储器 804可以 通过系统总线或其他方式相连, 图 8中以系统总线相连为例; 系统总线可 以是 ISA总线、 PCI总线或 EISA总线等。 所述系统总线可以分为地址总 线、 数据总线、 控制总线等。 为便于表示, 图 8中仅用一条线表示, 但并 不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。  FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a hardware structure of a receiving device according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention. The receiving device in this embodiment may be a base station or a terminal. As shown in FIG. 8, the receiving device 800 of this embodiment may include: a receiver 801 and a transmitter 802. Optionally, the receiving device may further include a processor 803 and a memory 804. The receiver 801, the transmitter 802, the processor 803, and the memory 804 may be connected through a system bus or the like. In FIG. 8, the system bus is connected as an example; the system bus may be an ISA bus, a PCI bus, or an EISA bus. The system bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of representation, only one line is shown in Figure 8, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
其中, 接收器 801, 可以用于基于发送设备发送的参考信号, 从码本中 选择预编码矩阵 W, 其中, 所述预编码矩阵 W为第一码本 W1和第二码本 W2的乘积或直积,  The receiver 801 may be configured to select a precoding matrix W from the codebook based on a reference signal sent by the sending device, where the precoding matrix W is a product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 or Direct product,
其中, 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 The order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), is greater than or equal to the second codebook.
W2的阶数 Rank (W2); The order of W2 Rank (W2);
发送器 802, 可以用于向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所 述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  The transmitter 802 is configured to send channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel state indication information.
进一步地, 第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 为 1。  Further, the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2), is 1.
本实施例的接收设备, 可以用于执行图 3所示方法实施例的技术方案, 其实现原理类似, 此处不再赘述。  The receiving device of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and the implementation principle thereof is similar, and details are not described herein again.
本实施例的接收设备, 基于发送设备发送的参考信号从码本中选择预 编码矩阵 W时, 通过采用代表水平向的第一码本 W1 与代表垂直向的码 本第二码本 W2的直积来构造,从而能够在码本中表现出三维波束矢量的特 征, 因此所构造的预编码矩阵 W可以作为 3维 (3D ) 码本; 并且通过限 定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 W2的 阶数 Rank (W2 ) , 使得所构造的 3D码本 W符合 3D信道在垂直向扩展 角度小于水平向扩展角度的特性, 因此, 所构造的 3D码本的精度较高, 因此, 发送设备基于接收设备反馈的从本发明的码本结构中选择的预编码 矩阵进行预编码, 可以有效地提高预编码的精度, 从而减少性能损失, 提 高系统的吞吐量。 The receiving device of this embodiment selects the precoding matrix W from the codebook based on the reference signal transmitted by the transmitting device, by using the first codebook W1 representing the horizontal direction and the second codebook W2 representing the vertical codebook. Constructed to be able to represent the characteristics of the three-dimensional beam vector in the codebook, so the constructed precoding matrix W can be used as a 3-dimensional (3D) codebook; and by defining the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, such that the constructed 3D codebook W conforms to the characteristic that the 3D channel is smaller than the horizontal expansion angle at the vertical expansion angle, and thus, the constructed The accuracy of the 3D codebook is high. Therefore, the transmitting device performs precoding based on the precoding matrix selected from the codebook structure of the present invention fed back by the receiving device, which can effectively improve the accuracy of the precoding, thereby reducing performance loss. High system throughput.
进一步地, 本实施例的接收设备还可以有以下六种具体的实现方式。 在第一种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia和第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie; Further, the receiving device of this embodiment may also have the following six specific implementation manners. In a first implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ;
所述发送器 802具体可以用于:  The transmitter 802 can be specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据预 设的规则或预设的预编码矩阵指示的指示符与码本阶数的映射关系分别确定 所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数, 并根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  Transmitting the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the first code according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order The order of the W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 are determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
在第二种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本对应 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 信道质量信息指示符 CQI、 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述预 编码矩阵 W的总阶数; In a second implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, and a channel a quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送器 802具体可以用于:  The transmitter 802 can be specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述 第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的阶数和所述第 二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W;  Transmitting, by the sending device, the channel state indication information, so that the sending device determines the second according to the order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and the total order of the precoding matrix W. The order of the codebook W2 is Rank (W2), and the precoding matrix W is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2;
所述处理器 803, 可以用于在所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状 态指示信息之前, 将所述第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia与所述 第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl )进行联合编码, 将所述第二码本 W2的预编 码矩阵指示的指示符 ie与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 The processor 803 may be configured to: after the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook and the first code The order Rank (W1) of the W1 is jointly encoded, and the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 is jointly encoded with the CQI.
在第三种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本对应 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 所述 CQI、 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总 阶数; In a third implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送器 802具体可以用于:  The transmitter 802 can be specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述 第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的阶数和所述第 二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 Transmitting the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the first according to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W The order of the codebook W1, Rank (Wl), and according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the first The order of the two codebooks W2 determines the precoding matrix W.
此处, 该处理器 803, 可以用于在所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信 道状态指示信息之前, 将所述第二码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie与 所述第二码本 W2 的阶数 Rank (W2) 进行联合编码, 将所述第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 Here, the processor 803 may be configured to: after the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device, the indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the second codebook and the first The order Rank (W2) of the two codebooks W2 is jointly coded, and the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 is jointly encoded with the CQI.
在第四种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量 化值;  In a fourth implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: a combination of the combination of the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) Value
所述发送器 802具体可以用于:  The transmitter 802 can be specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2), 并根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2 的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  Transmitting the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device is based on the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) The combined quantized value determines an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, and according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the The order of the second codebook W2 determines the precoding matrix W.
进一步地, 所述信道状态指示信息除了包括所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Further, the channel state indication information includes an order of the first codebook W1
Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的组合的量化值之外, 还可以包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数。 以使所述发送设备进一步验证根 据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank(Wl )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank(W2) 的组合的量化值确定的所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码 本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的正确性。 In addition to the quantized value of the combination of the Rank (W1) and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, the total order of the precoding matrix W may also be included. The first code determined by the transmitting device to further verify a combined quantized value according to a combination of the order Rank(W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank(W2) of the second codebook W2 The correctness of the order Rank of the W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2).
在第五种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  In a fifth implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述发送器 802具体可以用于:  The transmitter 802 can be specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所述第 一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。  Transmitting, by the transmitting device, channel state indication information, so that the transmitting device determines the precoding matrix W according to an order of the first codebook W1 and an order of the second codebook W2.
在第六种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 所述预编码矩 阵 W的总阶数;  In a sixth implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送器 802具体可以用于:  The transmitter 802 can be specifically configured to:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数和所述接收设备的天线配置信息确定所述第一码本 Wl 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2), 并根据所 述第一码本 Wl的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W, 其中, 所述发送设备的天线配置信息包括: 第一天线端口数、 第二天线端口 数和天线的极化类型。 Transmitting the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the first codebook according to a total order of the precoding matrix W and antenna configuration information of the receiving device. The order Rank of the W1 (Wl) and the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2), and determine the order according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 The precoding matrix W, wherein the antenna configuration information of the transmitting device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type.
进一步地,上述各种实现方式中,所述第一码本 W1和所述第二码本 W2 分别可以从长期演进 LTE系统的 2天线码本、 4天线码本或者 8天线码本中 选取。  Further, in the foregoing various implementation manners, the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 may be selected from a 2-antenna codebook, a 4-antenna codebook, or an 8-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, respectively.
图 9为本发明发送设备实施例二的硬件结构示意图, 本实施例的发送设 备可以为基站或者终端。 如图 9所示, 本实施例的发送设备 900可以包括: 发送器 901、 接收器 902和处理器 903, 可选地, 该接收设备还可以包括存 储器 904。 其中, 发送器 901、 接收器 902、 处理器 903和存储器 903可以 通过系统总线或其他方式相连, 图 9中以系统总线相连为例; 系统总线可 以是 ISA总线、 PCI总线或 EISA总线等。 所述系统总线可以分为地址总 线、 数据总线、 控制总线等。 为便于表示, 图 9中仅用一条线表示, 但并 不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。 其中,  FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of the second embodiment of the sending device of the present invention. The sending device in this embodiment may be a base station or a terminal. As shown in FIG. 9, the transmitting device 900 of this embodiment may include: a transmitter 901, a receiver 902, and a processor 903. Optionally, the receiving device may further include a memory 904. The transmitter 901, the receiver 902, the processor 903, and the memory 903 can be connected through a system bus or the like. In FIG. 9, the system bus is connected as an example; the system bus can be an ISA bus, a PCI bus, or an EISA bus. The system bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of representation, only one line is shown in Figure 9, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus. among them,
发送器 901, 可以用于向接收设备发送参考信号;  The transmitter 901 is configured to send a reference signal to the receiving device.
接收器 902, 可以用于接收所述接收设备发送的信道状态指示信息; 处理器 903, 可以用于根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基 于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W,其中,所述预编码矩阵 W为两个 矩阵 W1和 W2的直积或乘积,  The receiver 902 may be configured to receive the channel state indication information that is sent by the receiving device, where the processor 903 may be configured to determine, according to the channel state indication information, a precoding matrix selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal. W, wherein the precoding matrix W is a direct product or a product of two matrices W1 and W2,
其中, 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。  The order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
进一步地, 第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 为 1。  Further, the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2), is 1.
本实施例的发送设备, 可以用于执行图 4所示方法实施例的技术方案, 其实现原理类似, 此处不再赘述。  The sending device of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and the implementation principle is similar, and details are not described herein again.
本实施例的发送设备, 根据所接收的信道状态指示信息确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 由于发送设备所选择的 的预编码矩阵 W为代表水平向的第一码本 W1 与代表垂直向的码本第二 码本 W2的直积或乘积, 从而能够在码本中表现出三维波束矢量的特征, 因 此该预编码矩阵 W可以作为 3D码本; 并且通过限定所述第一码本 W1的 阶数 Rank (Wl ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) , 使 得所述 3D码本 W符合 3D信道在垂直向扩展角度小于水平向扩展角度的 特性, 因此, 所述 3D码本的精度较高, 因此, 发送设备基于接收设备反 馈的从本发明的码本结构中选择的预编码矩阵进行预编码, 可以有效地提 高预编码的精度, 从而减少性能损失, 提高系统的吞吐量。 The transmitting device of this embodiment determines, according to the received channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, because the precoding matrix W selected by the transmitting device is representative of the horizontal direction. a direct product or a product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 representing the vertical codebook, so that the characteristics of the three-dimensional beam vector can be expressed in the codebook, and thus the precoding matrix W can be used as a 3D codebook; By defining the first codebook W1 The order Rank (Wl) is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, such that the 3D codebook W conforms to the characteristic that the 3D channel is smaller than the horizontal expansion angle at the vertical expansion angle, and therefore, The accuracy of the 3D codebook is high. Therefore, the transmitting device performs precoding based on the precoding matrix selected from the codebook structure of the present invention fed back by the receiving device, which can effectively improve the accuracy of the precoding, thereby reducing performance loss and improving. The throughput of the system.
进一步地, 上述实施例还可以有以下六种具体的实现方式。  Further, the foregoing embodiment may also have the following six specific implementation manners.
在第一种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia和第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie; 所述处理器 903具体可以用于: In a first implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 ; The processor 903 can be specifically used to:
根据预设的规则或预设的预编码矩阵指示的指示符与码本阶数的映射关 系分别确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数;  Determining the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
在第二种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本对应 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 信道质量信息指示符 CQI、 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述预 编码矩阵 W的总阶数; In a second implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, and a channel a quality information indicator CQI, an order Rank of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述处理器 903具体可以用于:  The processor 903 can be specifically configured to:
根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶 数确定所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  Determining the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 according to the order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
在第三种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 第一码本对应 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 所述 CQI、 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总 阶数; In a third implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an indicator i a indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator i e indicated by a precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, a CQI, an order Rank of the second codebook W2 (W2), and a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述处理器 903具体可以用于:  The processor 903 can be specifically configured to:
根据所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶 数确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl );  Determining the order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 according to the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 w。 Determining the receiving according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 The device is based on the precoding matrix w selected from the codebook based on the reference signal.
在第四种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)的组合的量化值; 所述处理器 903具体可以用于:  In a fourth implementation manner, the channel state indication information includes: a combined quantized value of the order Rank of the first codebook W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2 (W2) The processor 903 can be specifically configured to:
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 According to the order of the first codebook W1, Rank (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2
Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所 述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2); The combined quantized value of Rank (W2) determines the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
进一步地, 所述信道状态指示信息除了包括所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Further, the channel state indication information includes an order of the first codebook W1
Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的组合的量化值之外, 还可以包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数。 以使所述发送设备进一步验证根 据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank(Wl )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank(W2) 的组合的量化值确定的所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码 本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的正确性。 In addition to the quantized value of the combination of the Rank (W1) and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, the total order of the precoding matrix W may also be included. The first code determined by the transmitting device to further verify a combined quantized value according to a combination of the order Rank(W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank(W2) of the second codebook W2 The correctness of the order Rank of the W1 (W1) and the order of the second codebook W2, Rank (W2).
在第五种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2);  In a fifth implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述处理器 903具体可以用于:  The processor 903 can be specifically configured to:
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
在第六种实现方式中, 所述信道状态指示信息可以包括: 所述预编码矩 阵 W的总阶数;  In a sixth implementation manner, the channel state indication information may include: a total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述处理器 903具体可以用于:  The processor 903 can be specifically configured to:
根据所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数和所述发送设备的天线配置信息确定所 述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。 其中, 所述发送设备的天线配置信息包括: 第一天线端口数、 第二天线端口 数和天线的极化类型;  Determining, according to a total order of the precoding matrix W and antenna configuration information of the transmitting device, an order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and an order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2. . The antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: a first antenna port number, a second antenna port number, and an antenna polarization type;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。  Determining the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
进一步地,上述各种实现方式中,所述第一码本 W1和所述第二码本 W2 分别从长期演进 LTE系统的 2天线码本、 4天线码本或者 8天线码本中选取。 图 10为本发明通信系统实施例的结构示意图, 如图 10所示, 本实施例 的系统 1000包括: 接收设备和发送设备, 其中, 接收设备可以采用图 8所示 设备实施例的结构, 其对应地, 可以执行图 3所示方法实施例的技术方案, 发送设备可以采用图 9所示设备实施例的结构, 其对应地, 可以执行图 4所 示方法实施例的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。 Further, in the above various implementation manners, the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 The two antenna codebooks, the four antenna codebooks, or the eight antenna codebooks of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system are respectively selected. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a communication system according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 10, the system 1000 of the present embodiment includes: a receiving device and a transmitting device, where the receiving device can adopt the structure of the device embodiment shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 3 can be performed, and the sending device can adopt the structure of the device embodiment shown in FIG. 9 , and correspondingly, the technical solution of the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4 can be executed, and the implementation principle thereof is implemented. Similar to the technical effect, it will not be described here.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解: 实现上述各方法实施例的全部或部分步 骤可以通过程序指令相关的硬件来完成。 前述的程序可以存储于一计算机可 读取存储介质中。 该程序在执行时, 执行包括上述各方法实施例的步骤; 而 前述的存储介质包括: ROM、 RAM, 磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码 的介质。  One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that all or a portion of the steps to implement the various method embodiments described above can be accomplished by hardware associated with the program instructions. The aforementioned program can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. The program, when executed, performs the steps including the foregoing method embodiments; and the foregoing storage medium includes: a medium that can store program codes, such as a ROM, a RAM, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.
最后应说明的是: 以上各实施例仅用以说明本发明的技术方案, 而非对 其限制; 尽管参照前述各实施例对本发明进行了详细的说明, 本领域的普通 技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改, 或者对其中部分或者全部技术特征进行等同替换; 而这些修改或者替换, 并 不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本发明各实施例技术方案的范围。  Finally, it should be noted that the above embodiments are only for explaining the technical solutions of the present invention, and are not intended to be limiting thereof; although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those skilled in the art will understand that The technical solutions described in the foregoing embodiments may be modified, or some or all of the technical features may be equivalently replaced; and the modifications or substitutions do not deviate from the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present invention. range.

Claims

权 利 要 求 书 claims
1、 一种确定预编码矩阵指示的方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 1. A method for determining precoding matrix indication, characterized by including:
接收设备基于发送设备发送的参考信号, 从码本中选择预编码矩阵 w, 其中, 所述预编码矩阵 W为第一码本 W1和第二码本 W2的乘积或直积, 其中, 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 The receiving device selects the precoding matrix w from the codebook based on the reference signal sent by the sending device, where the precoding matrix W is the product or direct product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2, where, the precoding matrix W is the product or direct product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2. The order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the second codebook
W2的阶数 Rank (W2); Rank (W2) of W2;
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 The receiving device sends channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel status indication information.
2、 根据权利要求 1所述的方法, 其特征在于, 2. The method according to claim 1, characterized in that,
第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 为 1。 The order Rank (W2 ) of the second codebook W2 is 1.
3、 根据权利要求 1或 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 3. The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia和第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie; The channel state indication information includes: an indicator ia indicated by the precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator ie indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2;
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W, 包括: The receiving device sends channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel status indication information, including:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据预设的规则或预设的预编码矩阵指示的指示符与码本阶数的映射 关系分别确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数, 并根据 所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 The receiving device sends the channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the corresponding codebook order according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order. The order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 are determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2. W.
4、 根据权利要求 1或 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 4. The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 信道质量信息指示符 CQI、 所述第一码本 Wl的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; The channel state indication information includes: an indicator ia indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook , an indicator ie indicated by a precoding matrix indicated by the second codebook W2, a channel quality information indicator CQI, the said third The order Rank (Wl) of the codebook Wl and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W, 包括: The receiving device sends channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel status indication information, including:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总 阶数确定所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的 阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 The receiving device sends the channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines based on the order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and the total order of the precoding matrix W The order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
5、 根据权利要求 4所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述接收设备向所述发 送设备发送信道状态指示信息之前, 包括: 5. The method according to claim 4, characterized in that, when the receiving device transmits Before the sending device sends channel status indication information, it includes:
所述接收设备将所述第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia与所述 第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 )进行联合编码, 将所述第二码本 W2的预编 码矩阵指示的指示符 ie与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 The receiving device jointly encodes the indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook and the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1, and encodes the indicator i a of the second codebook W2 The indicator i e indicated by the precoding matrix is jointly encoded with the CQI.
6、 根据权利要求 1或 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 6. The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 所述 CQI、 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; The channel state indication information includes: an indicator ia indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator ie indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, the CQI, the second codebook The order Rank (W2) of W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W, 包括: The receiving device sends channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel status indication information, including:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总 阶数确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的 阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 The receiving device sends the channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines based on the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W The order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
7、 根据权利要求 6所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述接收设备向所述发 送设备发送信道状态指示信息之前, 包括: 7. The method according to claim 6, characterized in that, before the receiving device sends the channel status indication information to the sending device, it includes:
所述接收设备将所述第二码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie与所述 第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 )进行联合编码, 将所述第一码本 W1的预编 码矩阵指示的指示符 ia与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 The receiving device jointly encodes the indicator i indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the second codebook and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, and The indicator i a indicated by the precoding matrix is jointly encoded with the CQI.
8、 根据权利要求 1或 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 8. The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值; The channel state indication information includes: a quantized value of a combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W, 包括: The receiving device sends channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel status indication information, including:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 Wl的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所 述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的阶数和所述 第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 The receiving device sends the channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the order of the first codebook W1 according to the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank of the second codebook W2. The quantized value of the combination of (W2) determines the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, and according to the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 number and the order of the second codebook W2 determine the precoding matrix W.
9、 根据权利要求 8所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述信道状态指示信息还 包括: 所述预编码矩阵 w的总阶数; 9. The method according to claim 8, characterized in that the channel status indication information further Including: the total order of the precoding matrix w;
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所 述第二码本 W2的阶数, 包括: The receiving device sends the channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the order of the first codebook W1 according to the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank of the second codebook W2. The quantized value of the combination of (W2) determines the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, including:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的组合的量化值和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述第一码 本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数。 The receiving device sends the channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the order of the first codebook W1 according to the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank of the second codebook W2. The combined quantized value of (W2) and the total order of the precoding matrix W determine the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
10、 根据权利要求 1或 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 10. The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2); The channel state indication information includes: Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W, 包括: The receiving device sends channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel status indication information, including:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码 矩阵 W。 The receiving device sends channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 .
11、 根据权利要求 1或 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 11. The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数。; The channel status indication information includes: the total order of the precoding matrix W. ;
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设 备根据所述指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W, 包括: The receiving device sends channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the indication information, including:
所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发 送设备根据所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数和所述发送设备的天线配置信息确定 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank(Wl )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank(W2), 并根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码 矩阵 W, 其中, 所述发送设备的天线配置信息包括: 第一天线端口数、 第二 天线端口数和天线的极化类型。 The receiving device sends the channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the first codebook according to the total order of the precoding matrix W and the antenna configuration information of the sending device. The order Rank(W1) of W1 and the order Rank(W2) of the second codebook W2 are determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2. Precoding matrix W, wherein the antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: the number of first antenna ports, the number of second antenna ports, and the polarization type of the antenna.
12、 根据权利要求 1~11中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一码 本 W1和所述第二码本 W2分别从长期演进 LTE系统的 2天线码本、 4天线 码本或者 8天线码本中选取。 12. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 are respectively from the 2-antenna codebook and the 4-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution LTE system. Select from codebook or 8-antenna codebook.
13、 一种确定预编码矩阵指示的方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 发送设备向接收设备发送参考信号; 13. A method for determining a precoding matrix indication, characterized by including: the sending device sending a reference signal to the receiving device;
所述发送设备接收所述接收设备发送的信道状态指示信息; The sending device receives the channel status indication information sent by the receiving device;
所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考信 号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 其中, 所述预编码矩阵 W为两个矩阵 W1 和 W2的乘积或直积, The sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, where the precoding matrix W is the product or direct product of two matrices W1 and W2 ,
其中, 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 Among them, the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the second codebook
W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。 Rank (W2) of W2.
14、 根据权利要求 13所述的方法, 其特征在于, 14. The method according to claim 13, characterized in that,
第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 为 1。 The order Rank (W2 ) of the second codebook W2 is 1.
15、 根据权利要求 13或 14所述的方法, 其特征在于, 15. The method according to claim 13 or 14, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia和第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie; The channel state indication information includes: an indicator ia indicated by the precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator ie indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2;
所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考信 号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括: The sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, including:
所述发送设备根据预设的规则或预设的预编码矩阵指示的指示符与码本 阶数的映射关系分别确定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶 数; The sending device determines the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order. number;
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。 The sending device determines the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
16、 根据权利要求 13或 14所述的方法, 其特征在于, 16. The method according to claim 13 or 14, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 信道质量信息指示符 CQI、 所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; The channel state indication information includes: an indicator ia indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook , an indicator ie indicated by a precoding matrix indicated by the second codebook W2, a channel quality information indicator CQI, the said third The order Rank (W1) of a codebook W1 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考信 号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括: The sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, including:
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述预编码 矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2); The sending device determines the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 based on the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。 The sending device determines the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
17、 根据权利要求 13或 14所述的方法, 其特征在于, 17. The method according to claim 13 or 14, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 所述 CQI、 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; The channel state indication information includes: an indicator ia indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator ie indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, the CQI, the second codebook The order Rank (W2) of W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考信 号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括: The sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, including:
所述发送设备根据所述第二码本 W2 的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 和所述预编码 矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ); The sending device determines the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 based on the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 w。 The sending device determines the precoding matrix w selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
18、 根据权利要求 13或 14所述的方法, 其特征在于, 18. The method according to claim 13 or 14, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值; The channel state indication information includes: a quantized value of a combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考信 号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括: The sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, including:
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码 本 W2的阶数 Rank( W2)的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2); The sending device determines the order of the first codebook W1 based on a quantized value of a combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 Rank (W1) and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 ;
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。 The sending device determines the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
19、 根据权利要求 18所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述信道状态指示信息 还包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; 19. The method according to claim 18, wherein the channel state indication information further includes: the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码 本 W2的阶数 Rank( W2)的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2), 包括: The sending device determines the order of the first codebook W1 based on a quantized value of a combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 Rank (W1) and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 include:
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码 本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确 定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2 的阶数 Rank (W2) o The sending device determines the quantization value of the combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W. Determine the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 o
20、 根据权利要求 13或 14所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ); 20. The method according to claim 13 or 14, characterized in that, The channel state indication information includes: the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考信 号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括: The sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, including:
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。 The sending device determines the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
21、 根据权利要求 13或 14所述的方法, 其特征在于, 21. The method according to claim 13 or 14, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; The channel status indication information includes: the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考信 号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 包括: The sending device determines, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, including:
所述发送设备根据所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数和所述发送设备的天线配 置信息确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) o 其中, 所述发送设备的天线配置信息包括: 第一天线端口数、 第二天线端口数和天线的极化类型; The sending device determines the order Rank (W1 ) of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 according to the total order of the precoding matrix W and the antenna configuration information of the transmitting device. Rank (W2) o Wherein, the antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: the number of first antenna ports, the number of second antenna ports and the polarization type of the antenna;
所述发送设备根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 确定所述接收设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。 The sending device determines the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
22、 根据权利要求 13~21 中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一 码本 W1和所述第二码本 W2分别从长期演进 LTE系统的 2天线码本、 4天 线码本或者 8天线码本中选取。 22. The method according to any one of claims 13 to 21, wherein the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 are respectively from the 2-antenna codebook and the 4-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution LTE system. Select from codebook or 8-antenna codebook.
23、 一种接收设备, 其特征在于, 包括: 23. A receiving device, characterized by: including:
接收模块, 用于基于发送设备发送的参考信号, 从码本中选择预编码矩 阵 W, 其中, 所述预编码矩阵 W为第一码本 W1和第二码本 W2的乘积或直 积, The receiving module is configured to select the precoding matrix W from the codebook based on the reference signal sent by the sending device, where the precoding matrix W is the product or direct product of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2,
其中, 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ); Wherein, the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
发送模块, 用于向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送 设备根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 A sending module, configured to send channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the channel status indication information.
24、 根据权利要求 23所述的接收设备, 其特征在于, 24. The receiving device according to claim 23, characterized in that,
第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 为 1。 The order Rank (W2 ) of the second codebook W2 is 1.
25、 根据权利要求 23或 24所述的接收设备, 其特征在于, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia和第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie; 25. The receiving device according to claim 23 or 24, characterized in that, The channel state indication information includes: an indicator ia indicated by the precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator ie indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2;
所述发送模块具体用于: The sending module is specifically used for:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据预 设的规则或预设的预编码矩阵指示的指示符与码本阶数的映射关系分别确定 所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数, 并根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 Send the channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the first code respectively according to a preset rule or a mapping relationship between an indicator indicated by a preset precoding matrix and a codebook order. The order of the codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 are determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
26、 根据权利要求 23或 24所述的接收设备, 其特征在于, 26. The receiving device according to claim 23 or 24, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 信道质量信息指示符 CQI、 所述第一码本 Wl的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; The channel state indication information includes: an indicator ia indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook , an indicator ie indicated by a precoding matrix indicated by the second codebook W2, a channel quality information indicator CQI, the said third The order Rank (Wl) of the codebook Wl and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送模块具体用于: The sending module is specifically used for:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述 第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的阶数和所述第 二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 Send the channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the second codebook based on the order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and the total order of the precoding matrix W. The order Rank (W2) of the codebook W2 is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
27、 根据权利要求 26所述的接收设备, 其特征在于, 还包括: 27. The receiving device according to claim 26, further comprising:
编码模块, 用于在所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息 之前,将所述第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ^与所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 进行联合编码, 将所述第二码本 W2 的预编码矩阵指示 的指示符 ie与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 An encoding module, configured to compare the indicator ^ indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook with the order of the first codebook W1 before the receiving device sends the channel state indication information to the sending device. Rank (Wl) is jointly encoded, and the indicator i indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2 is jointly encoded with the CQI.
28、 根据权利要求 23或 24所述的接收设备, 其特征在于, 28. The receiving device according to claim 23 or 24, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 所述 CQI、 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; The channel state indication information includes: an indicator ia indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator ie indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, the CQI, the second codebook The order Rank (W2) of W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送模块具体用于: The sending module is specifically used for:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述 第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ), 并根据所述第一码本 Wl的阶数和所述第 二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 Send the channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the first order according to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W. The order Rank (Wl) of the codebook W1 is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
29、 根据权利要求 28所述的接收设备, 其特征在于, 还包括: 编码模块, 用于在所述接收设备向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息 之前,将所述第二码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie与所述第二码本 W2 的阶数 Rank (W2) 进行联合编码, 将所述第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示 的指示符 ia与所述 CQI进行联合编码。 29. The receiving device according to claim 28, further comprising: an encoding module, configured to convert the second codebook corresponding to the second codebook before the receiving device sends the channel status indication information to the sending device. The indicator ie indicated by the precoding matrix is jointly encoded with the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, and the indicator ia indicated by the precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 is combined with the CQI Perform joint coding.
30、 根据权利要求 23或 24所述的接收设备, 其特征在于, 30. The receiving device according to claim 23 or 24, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值; The channel state indication information includes: a quantized value of a combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述发送模块具体用于: The sending module is specifically used for:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数,并根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定 所述预编码矩阵 W。 Send the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines according to the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2. The combined quantized value determines the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2, and based on the order of the first codebook W1 and the second codebook The order of W2 determines the precoding matrix W.
31、 根据权利要求 30所述的接收设备, 其特征在于, 所述信道状态指示 信息还包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; 31. The receiving device according to claim 30, wherein the channel status indication information further includes: the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送模块具体用于: The sending module is specifically used for:
向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数。 Send the channel state indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines according to the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2. The combined quantization value and the total order of the precoding matrix W determine the order Rank (W1 ) of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
32、 根据权利要求 23或 24所述的接收设备, 其特征在于, 32. The receiving device according to claim 23 or 24, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2); The channel state indication information includes: Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述发送模块具体用于: The sending module is specifically used for:
向所述发送设备发送信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所述第 一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W。 Channel state indication information is sent to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the precoding matrix W according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
33、 根据权利要求 23或 24所述的接收设备, 其特征在于, 33. The receiving device according to claim 23 or 24, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; The channel status indication information includes: the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述发送模块具体用于: 向所述发送设备发送所述信道状态指示信息, 以使所述发送设备根据所 述预编码矩阵 w的总阶数和所述发送设备的天线配置信息确定所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2), 并根据所 述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述预编码矩阵 W, 其中, 所述发送设备的天线配置信息包括: 第一天线端口数、 第二天线端口 数和天线的极化类型。 The sending module is specifically used for: Send the channel status indication information to the sending device, so that the sending device determines the order of the first codebook W1 according to the total order of the precoding matrix w and the antenna configuration information of the sending device. Rank (W1) and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2, and determine the precoding matrix W according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2. , wherein the antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: the number of first antenna ports, the number of second antenna ports, and the polarization type of the antenna.
34、 根据权利要求 23~33中任一项所述的接收设备, 其特征在于, 所述 第一码本 W1和所述第二码本 W2分别从长期演进 LTE系统的 2天线码本、 4 天线码本或者 8天线码本中选取。 34. The receiving device according to any one of claims 23 to 33, wherein the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 are respectively derived from the 2-antenna codebook and 4-antenna codebook of the Long Term Evolution LTE system. Select from the antenna codebook or 8-antenna codebook.
35、 一种发送设备, 其特征在于, 包括: 35. A sending device, characterized in that it includes:
发送模块, 用于向接收设备发送参考信号; The sending module is used to send reference signals to the receiving device;
接收模块, 用于接收所述接收设备发送的信道状态指示信息; A receiving module, configured to receive channel status indication information sent by the receiving device;
处理模块, 用于根据所述信道状态指示信息确定所述接收设备基于参考 信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W, 其中, 所述预编码矩阵 W为两个矩阵 W1和 W2的乘积或直积, A processing module configured to determine, according to the channel state indication information, the precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal, where the precoding matrix W is the product of two matrices W1 and W2 or a direct result. product,
其中, 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 大于或等于所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。 Wherein, the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 is greater than or equal to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2.
36、 根据权利要求 35所述的发送设备, 其特征在于, 36. The sending device according to claim 35, characterized in that,
第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 为 1。 The order Rank (W2 ) of the second codebook W2 is 1.
37、 根据权利要求 35或 36所述的发送设备, 其特征在于, 37. The sending device according to claim 35 or 36, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本 W1 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia和第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie; The channel state indication information includes: an indicator ia indicated by the precoding matrix of the first codebook W1 and an indicator ie indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2;
所述处理模块具体用于: The processing module is specifically used for:
根据预设的规则或预设的预编码矩阵指示的指示符与码本阶数的映射关 系分别确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数; Determine the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2 respectively according to the mapping relationship between the indicator indicated by the preset rules or the preset precoding matrix and the codebook order;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。 The precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
38、 根据权利要求 35或 36所述的发送设备, 其特征在于, 38. The sending device according to claim 35 or 36, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 信道质量信息指示符 CQI、 所述第一码本 Wl的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; 所述处理模块具体用于: The channel state indication information includes: an indicator ia indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook , an indicator ie indicated by a precoding matrix corresponding to the second codebook W2, a channel quality information indicator CQI, The order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook Wl and the total order of the precoding matrix W; the processing module is specifically used to:
根据所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶 数确定所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2); Determine the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 according to the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。 The precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
39、 根据权利要求 35或 36所述的发送设备, 其特征在于, 39. The sending device according to claim 35 or 36, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 第一码本对应的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ia、 第二码本 W2 的预编码矩阵指示的指示符 ie、 所述 CQI、 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; The channel state indication information includes: an indicator ia indicated by the precoding matrix corresponding to the first codebook, an indicator ie indicated by the precoding matrix of the second codebook W2, the CQI, the second codebook The order Rank (W2) of W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述处理模块具体用于: The processing module is specifically used for:
根据所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶 数确定所述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ); Determine the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 according to the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。 The precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
40、 根据权利要求 35或 36所述的发送设备, 其特征在于, 40. The sending device according to claim 35 or 36, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值; The channel state indication information includes: a quantized value of a combination of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
所述处理模块具体用于: The processing module is specifically used for:
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 According to the order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2
Rank (W2) 的组合的量化值确定所述第一码本 Wl的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所 述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2); The combined quantized value of Rank (W2) determines the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。 The precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
41、 根据权利要求 40所述的发送设备, 其特征在于, 所述信道状态指示 信息还包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; 41. The transmitting device according to claim 40, wherein the channel status indication information further includes: the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述处理模块具体用于: The processing module is specifically used for:
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ) 的组合的量化值和所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数确定所述第一码 本 W1的阶数 Rank (Wl ) 和所述第二码本 W2的阶数。 The first codebook W1 is determined based on the combined quantized value of the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 and the total order of the precoding matrix W. The order Rank (Wl) of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
42、 根据权利要求 35或 36所述的发送设备, 其特征在于, 所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述第一码本 W1 的阶数 Rank (W1 ) 和 所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2 ); 42. The transmitting device according to claim 35 or 36, characterized in that the channel state indication information includes: the order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W1) of the second codebook W2. Number Rank (W2);
所述处理模块具体用于: The processing module is specifically used for:
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。 The precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
43、 根据权利要求 35或 36所述的发送设备, 其特征在于, 43. The sending device according to claim 35 or 36, characterized in that,
所述信道状态指示信息包括: 所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数; The channel status indication information includes: the total order of the precoding matrix W;
所述处理模块具体用于: The processing module is specifically used for:
根据所述预编码矩阵 W的总阶数和所述发送设备的天线配置信息确定所 述第一码本 W1的阶数 Rank (W1 )和所述第二码本 W2的阶数 Rank (W2)。 其中, 所述发送设备的天线配置信息包括: 第一天线端口数、 第二天线端口 数和天线的极化类型; The order Rank (W1) of the first codebook W1 and the order Rank (W2) of the second codebook W2 are determined according to the total order of the precoding matrix W and the antenna configuration information of the transmitting device. . Wherein, the antenna configuration information of the sending device includes: the number of first antenna ports, the number of second antenna ports and the polarization type of the antenna;
根据所述第一码本 W1 的阶数和所述第二码本 W2的阶数确定所述接收 设备基于参考信号从码本中选择的预编码矩阵 W。 The precoding matrix W selected by the receiving device from the codebook based on the reference signal is determined according to the order of the first codebook W1 and the order of the second codebook W2.
44、 根据权利要求 35~43中任一项所述的发送设备, 其特征在于, 所述 第一码本 W1和所述第二码本 W2分别从长期演进 LTE系统的 2天线码本、 4 天线码本或者 8天线码本中选取。 44. The transmitting device according to any one of claims 35 to 43, characterized in that the first codebook W1 and the second codebook W2 are respectively derived from the 2-antenna codebook and 4 of the Long Term Evolution LTE system. Select from the antenna codebook or 8-antenna codebook.
PCT/CN2013/086414 2013-11-01 2013-11-01 Method for determining precoding matrix indication, receiving device, and sending device WO2015062069A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201380008900.4A CN104782070B (en) 2013-11-01 2013-11-01 Determine method, receiving device and the sending device of pre-coding matrix instruction
PCT/CN2013/086414 WO2015062069A1 (en) 2013-11-01 2013-11-01 Method for determining precoding matrix indication, receiving device, and sending device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2013/086414 WO2015062069A1 (en) 2013-11-01 2013-11-01 Method for determining precoding matrix indication, receiving device, and sending device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015062069A1 true WO2015062069A1 (en) 2015-05-07

Family

ID=53003179

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2013/086414 WO2015062069A1 (en) 2013-11-01 2013-11-01 Method for determining precoding matrix indication, receiving device, and sending device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN104782070B (en)
WO (1) WO2015062069A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10009088B2 (en) * 2016-03-28 2018-06-26 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Linear combination PMI codebook based CSI reporting in advanced wireless communication systems
CN108282204B (en) * 2017-01-05 2021-06-15 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, device and system
CN113541854B (en) * 2020-04-14 2022-12-13 华为技术有限公司 Data processing method, device and equipment

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101902312A (en) * 2010-06-21 2010-12-01 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and system for acquiring multi-precision channel information
CN102404084A (en) * 2010-09-16 2012-04-04 上海贝尔股份有限公司 Method for determining precoding matrix and corresponding communication method and device
CN102916768A (en) * 2012-09-19 2013-02-06 华为技术有限公司 Feedback method, device and system of high speed dedicated physical control channels

Family Cites Families (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR101276855B1 (en) * 2010-03-08 2013-06-18 엘지전자 주식회사 A method and a user equipment for transmitting precoding matrix information, and a method and a base station for configuring a precoding matrix
CN101826951B (en) * 2010-05-05 2016-03-30 中兴通讯股份有限公司 The method of feeding back channel state information and device
EP2757818A3 (en) * 2010-05-07 2014-09-24 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Method and system for quantized feedback rate adaptation in a communication system
CN101931513B (en) * 2010-05-18 2016-06-15 中兴通讯股份有限公司 The feedback method of channel condition information and terminal
CN102835054B (en) * 2010-08-26 2015-03-25 华为技术有限公司 Method and system for precoding
CN101969366B (en) * 2010-09-26 2012-11-14 华中科技大学 Pre-coding method for MIMO system of 8 transmitting antennas
US8913674B2 (en) * 2010-10-04 2014-12-16 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving codebook subset restriction bitmap
EP3651375A1 (en) * 2012-06-14 2020-05-13 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Method for determining precoding matrix indicator, user equipment, and base station evolved node b
ES2764386T3 (en) * 2013-08-08 2020-06-03 Huawei Tech Co Ltd Method for determining a precoding matrix indicator, receiving device and transmitting device

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101902312A (en) * 2010-06-21 2010-12-01 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and system for acquiring multi-precision channel information
CN102404084A (en) * 2010-09-16 2012-04-04 上海贝尔股份有限公司 Method for determining precoding matrix and corresponding communication method and device
CN102916768A (en) * 2012-09-19 2013-02-06 华为技术有限公司 Feedback method, device and system of high speed dedicated physical control channels

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN104782070B (en) 2018-05-29
CN104782070A (en) 2015-07-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3641452B1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting downlink control information (dci)
KR101819480B1 (en) Precoding matrix indicator feedback method, receiving end and transmitting end
US10432371B2 (en) Data transmission method, user equipment, and base station
CN108494450B (en) Method for determining precoding matrix indication, receiving equipment and transmitting equipment
KR101852914B1 (en) Method and apparatus for feedback of channel state information
WO2017020749A1 (en) Channel state information feedback method and related device for fd mimo system
WO2020035072A1 (en) Uplink transmission method and apparatus
WO2019062681A1 (en) Uplink transmission and configuration method, terminal, and base station
WO2014101242A1 (en) Method for reporting channel state information (csi), user equipment and base station
WO2014179990A1 (en) Method for determining precoding matrix indicator, user equipment and base station
WO2014194525A1 (en) Pilot signal transmission method, base station and user equipment
EP2945306B1 (en) Precoding matrix indication feedback method, and receiving end and transmitting end
CN108322244B (en) Precoding matrix indication feedback method, receiving end and transmitting end
WO2016161919A1 (en) Csi measurement and feedback method and device
WO2015039312A1 (en) Feedback method and apparatus for channel state information
WO2018094709A1 (en) Method, device, and system for determining precoding matrix
WO2015062069A1 (en) Method for determining precoding matrix indication, receiving device, and sending device
WO2023124943A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining precoding indication mode
EP4373004A1 (en) Information feedback method and related apparatus
CN110048820B (en) Configuration method, feedback method and device of channel state information

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 13896650

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 13896650

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1